OmniStrip 9450
Automatic Cut & Strip Machine
Reference Manual
Software Version 5.0x |Edition 8.1 (11-2013)
Address / distributors
Schleuniger AG
Bierigutstrasse 9
3608 Thun
Switzerland
P +41 (0)33 334 03 33
F +41 (0)33 334 03 34
info@schleuniger.ch
www.schleuniger.com
Schleuniger, Inc.
87 Colin Drive
Manchester, NH 03103
USA
P +1 (603) 668 81 17
F +1 (603) 668 81 19
sales@schleuniger.com
www.schleuniger-na.com
Schleuniger AG
Geschäftsbereich Solutions
Gewerbestrasse 14
6314 Unteraegeri
Switzerland
P +41 (0)41 754 53 53
F +41 (0)41 754 53 50
solutions@schleuniger.ch
www.schleuniger.ch
Schleuniger Japan Co., Ltd.
4-5-8, Tokai, Ota-ku
Tokyo 143-0001
Japan
P +81 (0)3 57 55 80 41
F +81 (0)3 57 55 80 45
sales@schleuniger.co.jp
www.schleuniger.co.jp
Schleuniger GmbH
Raiffeisenstrasse 14
42477 Radevormwald
Germany
P +49 (0)21 959 29-0
F +49 (0)21 959 29-105
info@schleuniger.de
www.schleuniger.com
Schleuniger Trading (Shanghai) Co., Ltd.
108, BH Center
7755 Zhongchun Rd
Shanghai, 201101
China
P +86 (21) 62 52 66 77
F +86 (21) 62 40 86 55
sales@schleuniger.com.cn
www.schleuniger.cn
© 2013 Schleuniger
EN | ID-0000000114-002
Part #:
Order #:
2|230
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
Table of contents
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1
GENERAL
1.1
MANUFACTURER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
1.2
MANUFACTURING DATE / PRODUCT TYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
1.3
1.3.1
1.3.2
1.3.3
INFORMATION ABOUT THE OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contents of the manual. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Depository. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Responsibilities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.4
1.4.1
1.4.2
GENERAL SYMBOLS AND LEGEND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
References and hints. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Legend. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
1.5
DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
1.6
LIMITATION OF LIABILITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
1.7
WARRANTY STATEMENTS AND POLICIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
1.8
1.8.1
COPYRIGHT PROTECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Trademarks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
1.9
SPARE PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
2
SAFETY
2.1
WARNING NOTICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
2.2
GENERAL SAFETY NOTES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
2.3
SOURCES OF DANGER / RISKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
2.4
INTENDED USAGE OF PRODUCT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
2.5
2.5.1
2.5.2
SAFETY SYMBOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Safety symbols used in manual. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Safety symbols on the product. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
2.6
SAFETY MARKING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
2.7
MODIFICATION AND RETROFITTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
2.8
2.8.1
PERSONNEL QUALIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Personnel classification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
2.9
2.9.1
2.9.2
2.9.3
2.9.4
PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Eye protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Protective clothes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety shoes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Snood-type cap or safety cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.10
SAFETY INSTALLATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
3
TRANSPORT / PACKAGING / STORAGE
3.1
TRANSPORT INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
3.2
UNPACKING / LOADING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
3.3
3.3.1
PACKAGING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
The packaging. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
11
11
11
12
12
15
18
18
18
18
19
20
3|230
Table of contents
3.3.2
Handling packaging material. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
3.4
INTERNAL TRANSPORTATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
3.5
STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
4
PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
4.1
DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
4.2
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
4.3
INTERFACE CONNECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
4.4
4.4.1
PLANNING DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Fixation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
4.5
RATING PLATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
5
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
5.1
CONCEPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
5.2
THE MAIN APPLICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
5.3
5.3.1
5.3.2
5.3.3
OVERVIEW OF COMPONENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Machine front. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Rear of machine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Operator panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
5.4
5.4.1
5.4.2
5.4.3
5.4.4
5.4.5
SAFETY ELEMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Overview safety elements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Safety cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Emergency stop button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Mains fuses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
External emergency stop link unit (option). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
5.5
5.5.1
DANGER ZONES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Danger zones. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
5.6
5.6.1
5.6.2
5.6.3
GENERAL MODULES AND OPERATING ELEMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Operator panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Power connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Fans. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
5.7
5.7.1
5.7.2
5.7.3
5.7.4
5.7.5
5.7.6
5.7.7
5.7.8
PROCESSING- AND FUNCTION MODULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Wire entry. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Wire end switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Left wire entry guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Swivel wire guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Transport units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Air jet unit (option). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Cutter head with blades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Stroke guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
5.8
5.8.1
5.8.2
5.8.3
5.8.4
5.8.5
5.8.6
5.8.7
CONNECTIONS (INTERFACES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
PREFEED connector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
POSTFEED connector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Connector ETHERNET. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
SERIAL Interfaces (SERIAL 1-3). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Connector CAN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Connector HS/PF (HotStamp / PreFeeder). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Pedal connector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
4|230
23
27
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
Table of contents
5.8.8
5.8.9
Connector „External emergency stop link unit“. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
USB connector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
5.9
5.9.1
5.9.2
SCOPE OF DELIVERY AND ACCESSORIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Scope of delivery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
5.10
5.10.1
5.10.2
OPERATING MODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Standard operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Safe mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
6
INSTALLATION / FIRST COMMISSIONING
6.1
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
6.2
SAFETY APPLIANCES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
6.3
POSITIONING / MOUNTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
6.4
6.4.1
CONNECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Supply sources. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
6.5
6.5.1
6.5.2
6.5.3
SETUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
First switching on. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General settings in the software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Machine setup / blade change. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.6
PRODUCING A TEST WIRE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
7
SCHLEUNIGER WIRE PROCESSING CONCEPT
7.1
SIMPLE MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
7.2
LIBRARY MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
7.3
7.3.1
WIRE LIST MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Additional properties in the "Wire List mode". . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
8
GENERAL HANDLING / OPERATION
8.1
8.1.1
8.1.2
8.1.3
8.1.4
GENERAL TOPICS FOR THE OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Safety instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Switching on the machine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Switching off the machine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Work to be done after operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
8.2
8.2.1
8.2.2
8.2.3
8.2.4
8.2.5
OVERVIEW CONTROL SOFTWARE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Screen layout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The main menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Footer line symbols. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
User level management (password protection). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wire and Wire List files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
59
59
60
60
61
63
9
SIMPLE PROGRAMMING MODE
69
9.1
GRAPHIC OVERVIEW "SIMPLE MODE" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
9.2
9.2.1
9.2.2
9.2.3
9.2.4
„WIRE“ SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Dimensioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Production data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Default [F5] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
43
44
44
44
45
53
59
5|230
Table of contents
9.2.5
9.2.6
General wire settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Raw Material. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
9.3
9.3.1
9.3.2
9.3.3
9.3.4
„APPLICATION - WIRE END“ SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
No stripping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Partial strip and full strip. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Window strip. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Multi-conductor cable (power cord). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
9.4
9.4.1
9.4.2
9.4.3
9.4.4
9.4.5
9.4.6
„APPLICATION - AREA“ SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Activate area application. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Add/delete an area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings for HotStamp devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings for Inkjet printer devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings for thermal transfer printer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.5
9.5.1
9.5.2
9.5.3
9.5.4
9.5.5
9.5.6
9.5.7
9.5.8
9.5.9
„PROCESSING - FEED“ SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
%-correction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Speed/ramp (acceleration). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Gap, left. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Gap, right. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Pressure, left. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Pressure, right. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Strip pressure, left/right. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Strip pressure, left/right. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Long end gap. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
9.6
9.6.1
9.6.2
9.6.3
9.6.4
9.6.5
9.6.6
„PROCESSING - CUT“ SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Speed/ramp (acceleration). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Blade. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Intersect. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Cut with long end gap. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Processing comment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
9.7
9.7.1
9.7.2
9.7.3
9.7.4
9.7.5
„PROCESSING - OPTIONS“ SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Left step - pull back. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Right full strip. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Short mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Strip compensation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Post processing mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.8
9.8.1
9.8.2
9.8.3
9.8.4
9.8.5
9.8.6
9.8.7
9.8.8
„PROCESSING - ELEMENTS" SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Blade. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Diameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Incision pause [ms]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Way back. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Speed/ramp (acceleration). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Discard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Air jet [ms]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Stripping mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
9.9
„WIRE COMMENTS” SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
10
LIBRARY MODE
10.1
OVERVIEW, „LIBRARY MODE“ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
10.2
10.2.1
„WIRE“ SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
Switching to "Library mode". . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
6|230
74
75
75
75
77
77
78
82
82
83
84
84
89
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
Table of contents
10.2.2
„Raw Material“ screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
10.3
10.3.1
10.3.2
SCREEN „APPLICATION“ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Simple strip. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Custom ends. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
10.4
„PROCESSING - ELEMENTS" SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
10.5
10.5.1
10.5.2
RAW MATERIAL LIBRARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
"Raw Material library" Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
10.6
10.6.1
10.6.2
PROCESSING LIBRARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
„Processing library“ screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
11
WIRE LIST MODE
11.1
OVERVIEW „WIRE LIST MODE“ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
11.2
11.2.1
11.2.2
SETTING "WIRE LIST" MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Switching to "Wire List" mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Back to single wire mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
11.3
LIST VIEWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
11.4
11.4.1
11.4.2
11.4.3
11.4.4
LAYOUT OF WIRE LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Produce. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fill Wire List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Save Single Wire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sort Wire List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.5
„WIRE LIST PROPERTIES“ SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
11.6
„STOP CONDITIONS“ SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
11.7
„STOP CONDITIONS COMMENT“ SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
11.8
11.8.1
11.8.2
PRODUCTION SEQUENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
List first. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Wire first. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
12
ENHANCED PRODUCTION
12.1
12.1.1
12.1.2
12.1.3
12.1.4
12.1.5
12.1.6
12.1.7
NORMAL OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Machine setup / blade change. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Programming a wire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Loading wire on the machine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Start the production. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Production in step by step mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Unloading a wire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Reloading a wire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
12.2
12.2.1
12.2.2
MESSAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Messages during start-up. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Messages during the production. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
13
CONFIGURATION SETTINGS
13.1
GENERAL SETTINGS FOR THE OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
13.2
13.2.1
OVERVIEW CONTROL SOFTWARE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Available view modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
99
102
102
102
102
107
113
7|230
Table of contents
13.2.2
13.2.3
13.2.4
Menu structure "Text mode". . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Graphic view. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Main menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
13.3
13.3.1
13.3.2
13.3.3
PRE-PROCESSING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
PreFeeder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
HotStamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Inkjet printer device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
13.4
13.4.1
13.4.2
13.4.3
13.4.4
13.4.5
13.4.6
13.4.7
13.4.8
13.4.9
13.4.10
MACHINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
Clock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Blade. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Transport units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Interfaces. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Utilities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Production. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
User interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Toggle user interface between graphic / text mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
User levels/password protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Maintenance reminder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
13.5
13.5.1
13.5.2
13.5.3
13.5.4
POST-PROCESSING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Current device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Without post processing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
WireStacker. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cablecoiler. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.6
13.6.1
13.6.2
COLLABORATION WITH PERIPHERAL DEVICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Pre-processing devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Post-processing devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
14
DIAGNOSTICS / TROUBLESHOOTING
14.1
14.1.1
14.1.2
14.1.3
14.1.4
14.1.5
14.1.6
14.1.7
GENERAL FAULT LOCALIZATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Safety instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Behavior in case of an error. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Fault indicators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Drawings / circuit diagrams / flow charts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Actions after solving errors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Causes of faults and action required. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
14.2
14.2.1
14.2.2
14.2.3
14.2.4
DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTIONS IN THE CONTROL SOFTWARE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
Overview control software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Pre-processing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Machine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Post-processing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
15
DATA MANAGEMENT / UPGRADES / SERVICES
15.1
MAIN MENU SERVICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
15.2
DATA BACKUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
15.3
DATA RESTORE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
15.4
15.4.1
15.4.2
15.4.3
SOFTWARE-UPGRADE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preparation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data backup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Upgrading. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8|230
122
123
123
123
124
135
149
150
150
150
151
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
Table of contents
15.5
COLD START OF THE MACHINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
15.6
15.6.1
15.6.2
15.6.3
15.6.4
LOGGING DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Update log. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Export log. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Delete log. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Logging settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
16
PROGRAMMING HINTS / EXAMPLES
16.1
16.1.1
16.1.2
16.1.3
CUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
Default setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Basic settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Correction: Wire length. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
16.2
16.2.1
16.2.2
16.2.3
16.2.4
PARTIAL STRIP WITH WINDOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158
Default setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Basic settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Correction: Finding the adequate Processing parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Correction: Optimize the production speed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
16.3
16.3.1
16.3.2
16.3.3
16.3.4
MULTI-CONDUCTOR CABLE (POWER CORD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Default setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Basic settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Correction: Conductor incised too much and blades scratch the wire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Copy wire end to the left side.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
16.4
16.4.1
16.4.2
16.4.3
16.4.4
16.4.5
16.4.6
16.4.7
WIRE MARKING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Default setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Basic settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Add an area with a HotStamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Add an area with an Inkjet printer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Production prepare. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Switching off the area function temporarily. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Managing areas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
16.5
16.5.1
16.5.2
16.5.3
16.5.4
CUSTOM APPLICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Default setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Basic settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Save Processing in the library. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating a new Raw Material. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16.6
16.6.1
LIBRARY MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Default setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
16.7
WIRE LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173
17
MAINTENANCE / MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
17.1
17.1.1
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Personal protective equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
17.2
17.2.1
17.2.2
CUSTOMER SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Hotline. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Behavior in case of an error. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
17.3
17.3.1
CLASSIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Access rights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
17.4
17.4.1
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
155
168
168
169
170
171
175
9|230
Table of contents
17.4.2
Maintenance chart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
17.5
17.5.1
17.5.2
ABRASION SUSCEPTIBLE COMPONENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Transport unit left/right. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Blades, cutter head. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
17.6
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS, DRAWINGS, SPARE PART LISTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
17.7
SPECIFICATION OF SPARE PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
17.8
17.8.1
17.8.2
GENERAL MAINTENANCE WORK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Daily maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Lubrication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
17.9
17.9.1
SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179
Calibration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
17.10
17.10.1
17.10.2
17.10.3
17.10.4
17.10.5
17.10.6
17.10.7
17.10.8
MAINTENANCE / REPAIR WORK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
General / safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Opening the housing of the machine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Stripping blades check / replace. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Lubricating gear rod Y-axis of cutter head. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Lubricating the spur gear unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Replace transport belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Exchanging mains fuses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Battery replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
18
SPARE PARTS / EXPLODED VIEW DRAWINGS
190
19
DECOMMISSIONING / DISPOSAL
191
19.1
DECOMMISSIONING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
19.2
DISASSEMBLY / DISPOSAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191
20
APPENDIX
20.1
20.1.1
OVERVIEW OF SYMBOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Footer line and list symbols. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
20.2
20.2.1
20.2.2
TIME / DATE FORMATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Time formats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Date formats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
20.3
20.3.1
20.3.2
MACHINE SOFTWARE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Installation of upgrade tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Windows CE Upgrade. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
20.4
20.4.1
20.4.2
20.4.3
ELECTRIC INTERFACES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Connector HS / PF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Serial Interfaces connections (Serial 1 - 3). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
PREFEED / POSTFEED connectors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
20.5
BLOCK DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209
20.6
20.6.1
LICENSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
EasyBmp C++ Bitmap Library. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
20.7
LUBRICATING GREASE MICROLUBE GBU-Y 131 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212
INDEX
10|230
193
225
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
1. General
GENERAL
Thank you for your trust in the Schleuniger technique! You have acquired a high performance Schleuniger product, designed and manufactured in our factory to your needs. Read through this manual
with due care and attention. It contains important tips and safety instructions, which allow precise
and reliable wire/cable production.
1.1
MANUFACTURER
In this Manual, Schleuniger AG Thun, Switzerland is referred to as manufacturer and abbreviated with
„Schleuniger“.
Schleuniger AG
Bierigutstrasse 9
3608 Thun
Switzerland
1.2
Phone: +41 (0)33 334 03 33
Fax: +41 (0)33 334 03 34
Email: Mailto:info@schleuniger.ch
Web: http://www.schleuniger.com
MANUFACTURING DATE / PRODUCT TYPE
See “EG-Declaration of Conformity (Register 2)“ of the ring binder.
1.3
INFORMATION ABOUT THE OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
▄
▄
▄
▄
1.3.1
The Operator's Handbook is part of the product and contains all the relevant information necessary to operate the product efficiently and safely as intended.
The mentioned safety notes and directions and as for the application field valid local accident
prevention regulations and general safety regulations must be complied.
If the product changes hands, the Operator's Handbook must be supplied to the new owner.
Make sure to update any relevant safety changes and corrections to the Operator's Handbook
which are available. Ask your local Schleuniger distributor for updates.
Contents of the manual
General
Each person using the product must be properly trained and have read and understood the Operator's Handbook. This is also imperative, even when the respective person has operated such a product
or similar previously and where they have been trained by the manufacturer.
The Operator's Handbook is no longer valid, if any of its contents (except a Quick Start Card, where
available) are removed or is changed on the data storage medium.
As Operator's Handbook we declare:
▄
▄
In printed form the entire content of the folder according to the contents table.
In electronic form, this „Reference Manual“, and the document „Parts Catalog“.
Construction
We are trying to make the operation of our products as easy as possible. To achieve this we have
developed a concept for the Operator's Handbook.
The Operator's Handbook consists of at least three parts:
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
11|230
1. General
Quick Start Card (optional)
The Quick Start Card is available as a quick reference to take out of the ring binder. It is meant for the
user (operator), which is operating the product daily. See chapter "2.8.1 Personnel classification
(Page 18)".
Reference Manual
A detailed description for the product and all options with full explanation of all functions available
and the maintenance. The Reference Manual is meant for the beginner as well as for the experienced
user (qualified personnel) as a learning- and reference guide. See chapter "2.8.1 Personnel classification
(Page 18)".
Parts catalog
A manual with the most important components of the product including the available options and
the wear parts. This part of the Operator's Handbook is intended mainly for the technical specialist.
See chapter "2.8.1 Personnel classification (Page 18)".
1.3.2
Depository
The Operator's Handbook must be available to the operating personnel at all times. Keep the Operator's Handbook in such a way that it will not become damaged, so that the contents will remain clearly legible beyond the expected lifespan of the product.
1.3.3
Responsibilities
▄
▄
This Operator's Handbook must be kept near the product. It must be available to the operating
personnel at all time.
Always follow the instructions in this Operator's Handbook fully and without restraint.
1.4
GENERAL SYMBOLS AND LEGEND
1.4.1
References and hints
The listed pictograms have the following meaning in the Operator's Handbook:
Tip:
Application note and other useful information which improves the intended
utilization of the product.
Magnifier:
Overview diagram, introduction chapter.
Procedure:
Important activity direction, programming example.
Topic:
Important safety relevant reference.
12|230
Info:
Information which helps to operate the
product efficiently and error-free.
1-2-3
3
Menu level:
Sub-screen with indication of the screen
level (viewed from main menu).
Figure reference:
Referencing of text to picture elements in
a previous figure.
Disposal:
Waste that must be recycled and not be
disposed of with household waste.
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
1. General
1.4.2
Legend
Key, button, pictogram Commands and operating areas on the screen are in the text shown in
bold, squared brackets and capital letters [KEY].
1.5
Screen title/menu
Screen titles and menu names are represented in the text in "inverted commas".
Electric signal name
Signal names are marked in capital letters and in "INVERTED COMMAS".
Cross referencing
Cross referencing is indicated in the text in color and italics, e. g. see chapter "1.4.2 Legend (Page 13)".
Activity direction
Activity direction (installation procedure, programming example and others) requests the user of the product to take an action. The activity direction is marked with a digit and an arrow „1»“.
Consequence of an
activity direction
Descriptions and affected actions in activity directions are marked with the
prefix „Ä“.
Measure
Measures in the manuals are given in millimeters.
DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY
See document “EG-Declaration of Conformity (Register 2)“ of the ring binder.
1.6
LIMITATION OF LIABILITY
The content of these operating instructions was put together taking into consideration the current
standards and guidelines according to the state of the technology and our many years of experience.
The manufacturer disclaims any liability for damages and accidents as a result of:
▄
▄
▄
1.7
Disregard of the instructions
Disregard of warning notices
Non-intended usage
WARRANTY STATEMENTS AND POLICIES
See Schleuniger document „General Conditions of Sale and Delivery”.
1.8
COPYRIGHT PROTECTION
Keep this Operator's Handbook confidentially. It is intended for the exclusive use of persons operating the product. Without written agreement, this manual shall not be made available to third parties.
The content of the Operator's Handbook in the form of text, illustrations, drawings, circuit diagrams
or other presentation, is protected by copyright law of the manufacturer.
1.8.1
Trademarks
Cayman™ and Iguana™ are trademarks of Schleuniger.
Windows® (XP, Vista, 7 or CE) are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in USA and other
countries.
All other brands or product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their owners.
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
13|230
1. General
Registered trademarks are not specially marked in these instructions. However, this does not mean
that they can be used freely.
For further information, see chapter "20.6 Licenses (Page 212)".
1.9
SPARE PARTS
Always order original spare parts from your local Schleuniger distributor.
Any modifications in design or function of the spare parts, in terms of ongoing product improvement,
are subject to change without prior notification.
CAUTION
Use of unverified spare parts!
Unverified or defective spare parts may lead to damage, malfunction or complete failure of the product and may affect safety. Therefore, exclusive use of
original Schleuniger spare parts is imperative.
14|230
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
2. Safety
SAFETY
2.1
WARNING NOTICES
The warning notices in the entire Operator's Handbook are marked with the following symbols. They
are headed by a safety alert symbol and the warning word which represents the degree of endangerment.
To avoid any injuries or material damage it is essential that you read and fully understand these symbols.
DANGER
Warning notice „Danger”
This panel indicates a hazardous situation, which if not avoided, will result in
death or serious injury.
WARNING
Warning notice „Warning”
This panel indicates a hazardous situation, which if not avoided, could result
in death or serious injury.
CAUTION
Warning notice „Caution
This panel indicates a hazardous situation, which if not avoided, may result in
minor or moderate injury.
NOTICE
Warning notice „Property damage”
This panel indicates a hazardous situation, which if not avoided, can result in
damage to property.
2.2
GENERAL SAFETY NOTES
▄
▄
▄
▄
▄
▄
▄
▄
The product must only be operated when in good working order and condition. It must be
checked for intactness prior to the start of operation.
Never operate the product in an explosive or flammable environment.
Only operate the product in a dry, dust-free environment.
Before performing any maintenance or repair work, unplug the machine from the mains and/or
from the air pressure supply.
Never operate the product without connecting the earth conductor.
Only use original Schleuniger equipment, especially interface connection cables (electromagnetic
compatibility).
The product must always be operated through the Schleuniger emergency stop link unit, if it
works together with peripheral devices in a production line. Only then can a safe interruption of
the complete production line during an emergency be guaranteed.
Any lubricating grease supplied with the machine, may only be used according to the instructions
given in this manual.
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
15|230
2. Safety
2.3
SOURCES OF DANGER / RISKS
With the use of technical products are dangers associated.
Dangers that could not be eliminated by design measures, and also not by protection devices are
residual risks. The safety instructions in this Operator's Handbook refer to the known residual risks.
Should be shown additional operational risks, the operator is obliged to inform Schleuniger immediately.
However, the following risks remain:
▄
▄
▄
▄
▄
▄
▄
▄
▄
▄
2.4
Inadequate maintenance can cause injury to the operator personnel and malfunction on the
product.
When working with a production line (PreFeeder, CableCoiler, WireStacker), in the wire/cable area
by catching body parts and clothing. Always close off these areas!
On the wire/cable exit, wires/cables are ejected with high speed. There is a danger of stab wound
and concussion injury. Always close off this area!
Risk of wire/cable blocking. Tensile forces can move to overturn machine, peripheral or bobbin
and injure the operator personnel.
The product may come down the working table due to vibration and injure the operator personnel.
A free standing panel may fall due to vibration and injure the operator.
Tripping, falling, slipping due to connection cables, wire residue and air hoses lying around.
Risk of increased noise levels while working with multiple machines in the room. Arrange for
noise control measures!
Wires/cables may contain talc which can strain the work environment during wire/cable processing.
By working with insufficient illumination in the workplace can cause injury.
INTENDED USAGE OF PRODUCT
WARNING
Only use the product according to the intended usage!
Any use of the product, which contradicts the intended use, is regarded as non-intended use. Schleuniger is not liable for any damages resulting from a non-intended use.
WARNING
Caution, risk of injury, property damage!
It is designed and manufactured exclusively for the following intended application:
The OmniStrip 9450 must be used only to cut off, cut through, stripping and slitting of cables, wires
and tubes within the given range according to the technical specifications.
Disregarding may lead to injury of the operator personnel and to property damage.
2.5
SAFETY SYMBOLS
2.5.1
Safety symbols used in manual
In this manual, safety symbols are used which alert the user to potential hazards. They will be described here in detail.
16|230
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
2. Safety
2.5.2
Electric current!
There is a danger of electric shock inside the machine. Therefore
before opening the machine always switch off the main switch
and unplug it from the mains. Touching any energized component leads to serious injury or death.
Electric current!
There is a danger of electric shock by contact with parts inside
the machine and on the mains socket. Therefore before opening
the machine always switch off the main switch and unplug it
from the mains. Touching electric components can cause injury
to the operator personnel.
Electrostatic sensitive components!
Electronic parts react sensitive to static charge. Specially marked
components and packaging must only be handled by trained
personnel after a potential equalization and with special equipment.
Safety symbols on the product
On the product, safety symbols are attached which alert the user to potential hazards. An overview
where this stickers are attached to, can be found in chapter "5.5 Danger zones (Page 32)".
2.6
Electric current!
There is a danger of electric shock by contact with parts inside
the machine and on the mains socket. Therefore before opening
the machine always switch off the main switch and unplug it
from the mains. Touching electric components can cause injury
to the operator personnel.
Processed wires
escaping!
On the wire exit wires are fed out at high speed of the machine.
Escaping wires can injure eyes, face and other parts of the body.
Do not stay in this area if the machine is running.
General danger
zone!
There is a general danger of injury from moving parts in the processing area. When reaching into the feeding area during production, the user can infringe on the fingers.
SAFETY MARKING
Safety markings affixed to the product, advert to possible danger situations and must be strictly
observed. The safety markings must not be removed. Damaged or illegible labels must be replaced
immediately.
For further information, see chapter "5.4 Safety elements (Page 31)".
2.7
MODIFICATION AND RETROFITTING
To avoid any dangerous situations and for an optimal performance, it is not allowed to make any
modifications to, or retrofitting of the product, without explicit written permission of the manufacturer or the local Schleuniger distributor. Standard options and accessories supplied by Schleuniger are
excepted.
2.8
PERSONNEL QUALIFICATION
The individual tasks may only be performed by persons listed in the respective chapter.
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
17|230
2. Safety
The product is intended to be operated by personnel older than 14 years. It is strictly forbidden to
grant access to younger person.
WARNING
Risk of injury if operated by unqualified personnel!
Improper handling of the machine may lead to serious injury to personnel
and damage to the property.
2.8.1
Personnel classification
The following classifications in these instructions are specified for the individual activities.
Operating company
As a parent entity that is responsible for the proper use of the product and for the training and the
commitment of authorized persons. It defines the mandatory competencies for its operation and
authority of the authorized personnel.
Technical specialists
Due to product-specific training and mechanical and electrical skill and experience, are qualified to
perform maintenance and repair work on the product.
Qualified personnel
Due to product-specific training, technical skill and work experience are qualified to install the software, to put the product into operation and to instruct the operating personnel.
Operating personnel
Is a person who has been trained and authorized by the management to operate the product safely
according to the instructions. They have the ability to identify all sorts of danger and to avoid it. This
includes an adequate knowledge of accident prevention and first aid procedures.
Third party
Externally called in personnel of the operating company, service technicians and staff from Schleuniger.
2.9
PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT
While working on the product, always wear protective equipment according to the local regulations
to minimize the risk of injury.
▄
▄
2.9.1
Always wear protective equipment necessary for the work being carried out.
Observe the safety markings for the protective equipment in the working area.
Eye protection
To protect the eyes from small particles produced during wire/cable stripping and cutting.
2.9.2
Protective clothes
Wear tight-fitting clothes with low tensile strength and no protruding parts. Protects from getting
caught up in moving machine parts.
2.9.3
Safety shoes
To protect from heavy, falling objects or reels.
18|230
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
2. Safety
2.9.4
Snood-type cap or safety cover
To protect long hair from getting caught up in moving machine parts.
2.10
SAFETY INSTALLATIONS
The built in safety interlocks on the machine (safety, protection, monitoring) must not be removed,
by-passed or changed. The safety circuits should be checked periodically. Defective safety equipments must be fixed immediately before work may be continued.
▄
▄
▄
▄
▄
Never operate the machine without the safety hood.
Never operate the machine if the safety cover is open.
The emergency stop buttons must always be accessible.
Do not remove any safety barriers.
Do not break in the emergency stop link between the machine and the peripheral devices.
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
19|230
3. Transport / packaging / storage
TRANSPORT / PACKAGING / STORAGE
During unpacking, transportation or storage of the product always observe the following instructions.
They contain important information to avoid injury to the operator and property damage. Take into
consideration the weight of the machine during transportation and loading. See chapter "4.1 Dimensions and weight (Page 23)".
NOTICE
Damage due to improper transportation!
Transportation by unqualified personnel may lead to extensive property
damage. Therefore:
▄
▄
Handle with care and always observe the symbols and hints on the packaging and the product when unloading and placing on site location.
Only use the intended transportation accessories.
The instructions in this chapter must be carried out by qualified personnel!
3.1
TRANSPORT INSPECTION
Check the goods immediately after receiving for completeness and loss during shipment.
For loss on the packaging during shipment, proceed as follows:
▄
▄
▄
3.2
Do not accept the delivery or only with exceptions.
Declare loss of shipment.
Immediately report damages on the product.
UNPACKING / LOADING
Lift the product carefully from the pallet by the help of a mechanical appliance. Remove any transport
lockers, binders and foam and check for free moving of cylinders and drives (if available, read the
packing instruction).
Lift the product on the enclosed handles or on the specially defined points.
NOTICE
Packaging notice!
If provided, observe the packaging notice on the machine.
NOTICE
Remove the transport fixations!
Before use of the product, remove, if present, any marked transport fixations.
For later transportation store the transport fixations.
20|230
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
3. Transport / packaging / storage
Fig. 1: Transportation lock on the cutter head unit
Notice! For later transportation do not throw away the transportation lock.
3.3
PACKAGING
3.3.1
The packaging
Store the packaging for later use on a weatherproof location.
3.3.2
Handling packaging material
Recycle the unneeded packaging.
See chapter "19 Decommissioning / disposal (Page 191)".
3.4
INTERNAL TRANSPORTATION
As applicable, transport the product in the original packaging.
Always carry around the product on the handles or by the help of a lifting device. During transportation in a sloping terrain, the product must be secured properly so that it cannot go away or slip
uncontrollably.
For lifting wherever applicable use a mechanical appliance. Always carry around the product as of a
certain weight with several people according with the regulations.
WARNING
Dislocation of packaging!
Danger from load dislocation. During transportation in a craft, the product may
slip off and cause serious material damage. Even the craft may start skidding,
which could result in an accident with incalculable consequences. Always secure
the product in the craft to prevent from slipping off.
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
21|230
3. Transport / packaging / storage
NOTICE
Position of center of gravity!
Danger through uneven weight balance. During transportation, the product
can get out of balance or slip if the position of center of gravity is not
observed. Position of center of gravity, see chapter "4.1 Dimensions and
weight (Page 23)".
3.5
STORAGE
Store the product under the following conditions:
▄
▄
▄
Not outdoor
Observe temperature conditions
Observe climatically conditions
See also chapter "4.2 Technical specifications (Page 23)".
22|230
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
4. Product specifications
PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
This chapter among others gives an overview of the important technical specifications of the product.
The technical data correspond to the theoretical values and achievable under normal conditions. Any
modifications in design or function, in terms of ongoing product improvement, are subject to change
without prior notification.
4.1
DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHT
Fig. 2: Dimensions
Description
Measures
Value
Unit
Weight
70
kg
Length (A)
579
mm
Width (B)
489
mm
Height (C)
401
mm
Position of center of gravi- Measured from the processing front to the 10
ty
center of the machine.
Packaged, observe the markings on the
packaging.
4.2
cm
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Description
Environment
Value
Unit
Temperature range
-5 to +45
°C
Relative humidity (maximum)
75
%
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
23|230
4. Product specifications
Description
Limit values
4.3
Value
Unit
Max. wire diameter
Ø 12.5
mm
Wire diameter stranded
20
mm2
Max. blade amount
3
Max. feed rate
2.1
m/s
Pull-off length left side
100
mm
Pull off length right side
200
mm
Short mode
up to 54
mm
Transport system
Transport belts
Program storage capacity
Standard / user defined
>1000
Mains connection
Power connection
100/115
230/240
VAC
Line frequency
50/60
Hz
Power consumption
800
VA
Compressed air
max. 7
max. 0.7
bar
MPa
Noise emission
Emission sound pressure level
<75
dB(A)
Options
Air jet unit, wire straightener, emergency stop link unit (NV1100)
INTERFACE CONNECTIONS
Description
Standard
USB
2 x on machine (USB memory stick, Cayman-dongle)
V 1.1/2.0 compatible
SERIAL 1 - 3
RS232 1: PC connection
ANSI TIA/
EIA-422
RS232 2/3: Inkjet printer for wire marking
24|230
ETHERNET
1 x for the connection to Cayman™, installed on an
extra PC or for general network purposes
PREFEED
For pre processing devices
ANSI TIA/
PreFeeder, HotStamp (active = synchronized driven, EIA-422
passive = not, or constant driven)
POSTFEED
For post processing devices
ANSI TIA/
Wire Stacker and CableCoiler (active = synchronized EIA-422
driven, passive = not, or constant driven)
HS/PF
For pre processing devices
PreFeeder, HotStamp
IEEE-standard
802.3
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
4. Product specifications
4.4
PLANNING DATA
The product must be placed on a solid, leveled work floor.
4.4.1
Fixation
Secure the machine from slipping off during operation. Use a robust table or the Schleuniger system
rack. Underlay the machine stand feet with a solid support.
The machine feet must flush with the table edge. Wire residue will then fall freely into a container.
Fig. 3: OmniStrip 9450 positioning
NOTICE
Over temperature!
Over temperature condition may occur if the fan exhaust is blocked in any
way. Be careful, not to cover the aperture of the ventilators on the left side
and the aperture on the right. A distance of at least 30 cm to the next object
should be maintained, to let the cooling air flow freely.
4.5
RATING PLATE
The rating plate with the "Melbau" number and the electric data is placed on the back side below the
power plug socket and contains the following information (the manufacturing year is contained in
the serial number):
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
25|230
4. Product specifications
Schleuniger AG
Bierigutstrasse 9 CH-3608 Thun / Switzerland
OmniStrip 9450
XXXX - 2011
100/115 VAC
230/240 VAC
50/60 Hz
Model:
Serial No:
Power rating:
T10 A
T5 A
800 VA
Made in Switzerland
1
4
2
5
1 Machine type
2 Permissible mains voltage
3 Internal fuse protection
26|230
6
3
4 Serial number
5 Mains frequency
6 Power consumption
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
5. Product description
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
This chapter gives a description of product specifications, information on the limits of the product
and points on the scope of delivery. The individual parts are shown and described by photographs.
Further provides the product description information about the functioning and the operation
modes.
5.1
CONCEPT
The OmniStrip 9450 is a flexible cut and strip machine for a wide range of applications. It is the ideal
solution for the production of medium to low volume processing of wires and cables. With the Indexing cutter head and the flexible programming and the proven Schleuniger wire processing concept,
multiple processing tasks can be carried out in a single step. The clearly laid out programming interface enhances the advantages of the database philosophy including wire and Processing libraries.
Special applications are easily realized thanks to the simple and logic menu structure.
The OmniStrip 9450 may be used as a stand-alone machine as well as in combination with various
peripheral devices creating a fully automated wire processing line.
5.2
THE MAIN APPLICATIONS
Processing capabilities include Single wire, Multi-conductor cables (Power Cords), Coaxial cables, Zip
cords, Plastic optical fiber (POF) and many more.
Application
Wire sample
Cut to length
Full- or partial strip left and right
Multi-step stripping
Multi-layer stripping
Jacket stripping of multi-cord wires
Jacket stripping of extremely thin insulations
Jacket- and inner wire stripping
Trim, separate and stripping of individual wires
Multi-step stripping with slitting and window
Wire marking
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
Schleuniger
Schleuniger
27|230
5. Product description
5.3
OVERVIEW OF COMPONENTS
5.3.1
Machine front
1
8
9
2
15
10
7
3
14
11
6
4
13
5
12
Fig. 4: Front view (operating area)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
28|230
Safety switch (key)
Operator panel
Right transport unit
Air jet unit (option)
Left transport unit
Safety switch
Wire entry guide
Safety cover
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Emergency stop button
Right wire guide
Cutter head with blades
Swivel wire guide
Left wire guide
Wire end switch
Fan
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
5. Product description
5.3.2
Rear of machine
1
7
6
2
11
5
10
4
3
9
8
Fig. 5: Rear of the OmniStrip 9450
1
2
3
4
5
6
ETHERNET
CAN (not used)
PREFEED
Rating plate and Windows CE license
Pedal
USB
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
7
8
9
10
11
SERIAL 1 - 3
POSTFEED
HS/PF (HotStamp/Prefeeder)
Mains connection
External emergency stop link unit
29|230
5. Product description
5.3.3
Operator panel
4
1
3
2
5
Fig. 6: Operator panel with keyboard and display
1 Screen
2 Entry keys
3 Function keys
30|230
4 Production keys
5 Navigation keys
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
5. Product description
5.4
SAFETY ELEMENTS
The product is equipped with the safety appliances and covers shown in the next figure. The operational reliability of the safety circuits must be checked periodically in the "Software diagnostics" if
available.
5.4.1
Overview safety elements
3
1
2
4
Fig. 7: Safety elements
1 Safety cover
2 Emergency stop button
5.4.2
3 Safety switch (key)
4 Safety switch
Safety cover
The safety cover prevents the user to touch moving components like blades, transport belts and movable wire guides during production. There is a risk of injury inside! Opening the safety cover is recognized by the safety switch. All power to the drives is cut immediately when opening it. Production
cannot be continued then.
The safety switch ensures a safe and secure operation of the machine.
5.4.3
Emergency stop button
The emergency-stop button interrupts any function on the OmniStrip 9450 immediately. For this,
push the red button fully down until it snaps in. Values entered while programming, are held in memory in the following manner:
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
31|230
5. Product description
▄
▄
in the "Wire" screen, if single or library wire mode is selected (but not in the sub screens)
in the "Wire List" screen, if Wire List mode is selected (but not in the sub screens)
With cancel [F7], the data can still be discarded after switching on the machine.
To disengage the emergency stop button, turn it clockwise.
If the emergency stop button is disengaged within 30 sec. the software is ready for operation immediately due to the buffering of the supply voltage. If switched off longer, the machine starts up with
its regular booting process.
NOTICE
Caution, property damage!
Use the emergency stop button only in an emergency case. Do not use for
normal system stop! Hence the machine and the connected peripheral devices can be damaged.
5.4.4
Mains fuses
The fuse holder contains the pluggable mains fuses for the main power protection of the machine.
Overload or other malfunction of the machine is monitored by the internal electronic circuits and
show up as an error message on the touch screen. The power fuse is a safety element which only malfunctions in special emergency cases (e. g. lightning, fire or if the control electronics fail).
See also chapter "17.10.7 Exchanging mains fuses (Page 189)".
WARNING
Electric current!
Hazardous voltage is present in the area of the mains socket and the fuses
during operation, which can lead to serious injury or death.
5.4.5
External emergency stop link unit (option)
An optional external Schleuniger emergency stop link unit can be connected. Therewith, a network of
automated cut and strip and also peripheral devices can be stopped immediately in an emergency
case.
Ordering info: For Schleuniger peripheral devices a suitable emergency stop link unit is available, see
„Parts Catalog“.
If you intend to use an emergency stop link unit of a third party vendor, check for compatibility with
your local Schleuniger distributor first.
5.5
DANGER ZONES
The dangerous zones on the product are marked in the following figure. The user must consult additionally the chapter "2 Safety (Page 15)" to inform him selves about residual risks.
WARNING
Danger if operated by unqualified personnel!
The product must only be operated by qualified operator personal. There are danger zones where
special caution is advised. Improper usage may lead to injury for the operator.
32|230
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
5. Product description
5.5.1
Danger zones
Fig. 8: Danger zones on the OmniStrip 9450
For a detailed description of the safety symbols listed in the overview, see chapter "2.5 Safety symbols
(Page 16)".
5.6
GENERAL MODULES AND OPERATING ELEMENTS
5.6.1
Operator panel
All operating elements for the wire programming are located on the operator panel. It includes the
display and the keyboard.
Screen
The screen with graphical representation of the wire is used for the support of in- and output commands.
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
33|230
5. Product description
Keys
Entering letters or digits via the alpha numeric keyboard, functions similar as on a cell phone. The
according letter is selected by repeatedly pressing the same key. Then the cursor jumps to the next
entry position. If the key is pressed more than one second, the corresponding number is called up
directly.
Production keys
Entry keys
[OPEN/
CLOSE]
Open / close: Open or close the [0...9]
transport belts.
Numeric keypad: To enter numbers
and digits in the input fields.
[FEED]
Feed: Feeds the wire forwards as [ESC]
long as the key remains pressed.
Escape key: To discard an entry.
[CUT]
Cut: To carry out a cutting oper- [DEL]
ation.
Delete key: To delete an entry.
[LOAD]
[UNLOAD]
Load /unload: To load or unload [ @ ]
a wire.
Toggle key: To switch between different commands in the drop down
list.
[RUN]
Start production: To start the [ . ]
production of a programmed
wire.
Decimal point: To enter the decimal
point.
[SINGLE]
Single wire: To produce a single [ I< ]
wire without incrementing the
"Total" counter.
Backspace key:
To jump to the previous entry field.
Within entry fields, delete character
on the left.
[STOP]
Stop key: To interrupt the pro- [ENTER]
duction.
Enter key: to jump to the next entry
field.
[+] [-]
34|230
Plus-/minus key: To change leading
sign, upper/lower case letters.
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
5. Product description
Navigation keys
Function keys
[HOME]
Home key: To move to topmost.
[F1...F7]
Function keys: To executes the
function shown in the footer line.
[EDIT]
Edit key:
To open the drop-down list.
[F+]
Shift key: To display an additional
layer of footer commands.
Edit text field.
[END]
End key: To move to bottom- [ I ]
most.
Reserved
[PGUP]
Page up key: To jump one page
up.
Reserved
[PGDN]
Page down key: To jump one
page down.
Arrow keys:
Within fields: To navigate to top,
bottom, left, right.
Within lists: To move the selection.
Within text fields: To navigate
within the field.
External USB-keyboard
The OmniStrip 9450 can also be operated with an external PC-keyboard connected to the USB port.
The language may be changed in the „Configuration” under „USB-Keyboard”, see chapter "13.4.7 User
interface (Page 120)".
Through this also Unicode characters can be entered in the text fields (for this keep pressing the
[ALT] key and enter the corresponding digits [0] - [9] to select the character).
Key assignment:
USB keyboard
Operating area of machine
USB keyboard
Operating area of machine
[F1...F7]
Function keys [F1...F7]
[F8]
Shift key [F+].
[HOME]
Navigation [Home]
[END]
Navigation end
[PAGE UP]
Navigation [PgUp]
[PAGE DOWN]
Navigation [PgDn]
Arrow keys
(up, down, left, right)
[INSERT]
Edit key [Edit]
[ESC]
Escape key [Esc]
[DEL]
Delete key [Del]
[+], [-]
Toggle [@]
[ENTER], [TAB]
Enter key [Enter]
[BACKSPACE]
Backspace key
[F9]
Open/close [Open/Close]
[F10]
Feed [Feed]
[F11]
Cut [Cut]
[F12]
Load/unload [Load/Unload]
[PRINTSCREEN]
[ALT+S]
Single wire [Single]
[SCROLLLOCK]
[ALT+R]
Start production [Run]
[PAUSE][BREAK]
Stop key [Stop]
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
35|230
5. Product description
External USB mouse (or similar input device)
The OmniStrip 9450 may also be operated with an external commercial PC-mouse or a similar input
device connected to the USB port. The mouse is activated in the „Configuration” under „Mouse support”. If necessary, also the mouse acceleration and the mouse speed may be changed here.
Generally the mouse on the OmniStrip 9450 is handled like on the PC-screen.
Specific mouse functions for the OmniStrip 9450 are listed below:
▄
▄
▄
▄
▄
▄
5.6.2
As soon as the mouse pointer is positioned over an active menu item, a data field or a footer line
symbol, the pointer changes into the hand symbol. Now the item can be selected with a mouse
click.
If more than one level is available in the actual screen, an arrow on the right and the left side of
the footer line is shown. To move to the next level, the mouse pointer must be positioned exactly
over this left or right arrow. The mouse pointer changes into the symbol „<->”. Then the level can
be selected with a mouse click.
In lists, the user may scroll upwards or downwards with the mouse wheel. But the scroll function
may also be executed by positioning the mouse pointer over the upper or lower area of the scroll
bar. The pointer changes into an arrow symbol showing up or down accordingly. Then scrolling
may be done with a mouse click.
A highlighted list item may be selected, instead of a normal click, also with the mouse wheel.
Herewith even if the mouse pointer is not positioned over this item.
A pop-up list may be closed again by just clicking outside of the list area. The selected item
though will not be selected (same function as [ESC] on the keyboard).
The available operations of the selected item (e. g. Configuration - User interface) may also be
changed with the mouse wheel instead of using [EDIT] or [@].
Power connection
Connecting the machine to the mains supply.
1
4
3
2
Fig. 9: Mains connection backside
1 Fuse holder
2 Mains connector
3 Main power switch
4 Locking clip fuse holder
Fuse holder
The fuse holder contains the two pluggable mains fuses.
Main power switch
The machine is switched on and off on the main switch.
36|230
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
5. Product description
Mains connector
NOTICE
Caution line voltage!
The OmniStrip 9450 must only be operated with the following line voltages:
Single-phase/protective earthing conductor (2P+E)
100/115 VAC, mains fuse T10 A or 230/240 VAC, mains fuse T5 A
50/60 Hz, 800 VA
5.6.3
Fans
Two fans serve for the cooling of the electronics and motors inside of the machine.
5.7
PROCESSING- AND FUNCTION MODULES
5.7.1
Wire entry
On the wire entry the wire is fed into the machine.
5.7.2
Wire end switch
The wire end switch monitors if a wire is inserted respectively if the processed material is used up. If
the wire end switch has dropped down, the production on the OmniStrip 9450 cannot be started. The
production is interrupted as soon as the wire end switch drops down, after the wire has been used
up. While loading a wire with [OPEN/CLOSE], the wire end switch is lift up automatically.
5.7.3
Left wire entry guide
The left wire guide (also called turret guide) centers the wire in front of the left transport belts and
can be set to different wire diameters. The wire guide is made up of several holes (3×Ø 3.3 mm, Ø4
mm, 2×Ø5 mm, Ø6 mm, Ø8 mm, Ø10 mm and Ø14 mm) and can therefore be adapted to the
desired diameter of the cable.
To set the turret guide to a certain diameter, loosen the knurled screw on top of the guide.
5.7.4
Swivel wire guide
The swivel guide is available in different diameters and types. Prerequisite to a proper production is,
that the wire to be produced feeds freely in the tube i. e. the tube inner diameter of the guide tube
should be 1 to -2 mm larger than the outer diameter of the wire.
In order to change the guide tube, loosen the knurled screw on the holder.
Optional to the standard set there are more diameters and also special guides available, see document „Parts Catalog“.
5.7.5
Transport units
The transport units feed the wire forth and back.
Optionally there are other transport belt types available, see document "Parts Catalog".
5.7.6
Air jet unit (option)
The air jet unit blows off residues from the blade area after each cutting cycle. For this, the
OmniStrip 9450 must be connected to a compressed air supply.
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
37|230
5. Product description
5.7.7
Cutter head with blades
On the cutter head, V-, Radius-, Die- or special blades (2 × 16 mm blade width or 3 × 10.6 mm blade
width) can be mounted.
Optionally there are additional blade types and tooling available, see „Parts Catalog“.
5.7.8
Stroke guide
As with the swivel guide, also the right wire guide is available with different inner diameters. It is
adaptable to the diameter of the wire this way.
For changing the wire guide loosen the knurled screw. For mounting, the side with the funnel must
face towards the cutter head.
Normally the same inner diameter is used as for the swivel wire guide.
Optional to the standard set there are more diameters and also special guides available, see document „Parts Catalog“.
5.8
CONNECTIONS (INTERFACES)
5.8.1
PREFEED connector
Through this interface, synchronized peripheral devices can be connected:
▄
▄
PreFeeder 1000
PreFeeder 2500
PreFeeder 1100
PreFeeder 3500
▄
▄
PreFeeder 2200
PreFeeder 4600 / 4700
▄
▄
To connect the listed devices to this connector, a special connecting cable is required. For a detailed
description of this interface, see chapter "20.4.3.2 PREFEED connector (Page 207)".
5.8.2
POSTFEED connector
Through this interface, synchronized peripheral devices can be connected:
▄
▄
CableCoiler 500
WireStacker 500
▄
▄
CableCoiler 1400
WireStacker 1000
▄
CableCoiler 4000
To connect the listed devices to this connector, a special connecting cable is required. For a detailed
description of this interface, see chapter "20.4.3.3 POSTFEED connector (Page 208)".
5.8.3
Connector ETHERNET
Reserved for the use in a network (e. g. together with the „Cayman wire processing software”, installed
on a PC).
5.8.4
SERIAL Interfaces (SERIAL 1-3)
Connector serial 1 (PC)
Reserved for PC.
Connector serial 2
Not used at this time.
38|230
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
5. Product description
Connector Serial 3 (Inkjet)
To this interface an Inkjet printer may be connected. This connector is used as the communication
interface to Schleuniger Inkjet printers.
5.8.5
Connector CAN
CAN 1 and CAN 2 are not used at this time.
5.8.6
Connector HS/PF (HotStamp / PreFeeder)
For the connection of a HotStamp or a PreFeeder device.
Connector for HotStamp devices (HS/PF)
On this interface a HotStamp device can be connected to the OmniStrip 9450. The OmniStrip 9450 produces a marking pulse and interrupts the device during the marking time.
The interface is adapted to the following Schleuniger products:
▄
HotStamp 4128
HotStamp 4140
▄
HotStamp 4500
▄
Connector for PreFeeder devices (HS/PF)
Through this interface a PreFeeder can be connected to the OmniStrip 9450. The prefeed operation
may be monitored by the OmniStrip 9450.
The interface is adapted to the following Schleuniger products:
▄
▄
5.8.7
PreFeeder 1000
PreFeeder 2500
▄
▄
PreFeeder 1100
PreFeeder 3500
▄
▄
PreFeeder 2200
PreFeeder 4600 / 4700
Pedal connector
To this connector an optional pedal can be hooked up. Therewith the production can be started or
stopped, see document "Parts Catalog".
5.8.8
Connector „External emergency stop link unit“
See chapter "5.4.5 External emergency stop link unit (option) (Page 32)".
5.8.9
USB connector
This interface is implemented to connect an external USB keyboard and a PC-mouse and to perform
backups and upgrades via an USB memory stick.
The OmniStrip 9450 is equipped with two USB ports.
5.9
SCOPE OF DELIVERY AND ACCESSORIES
5.9.1
Scope of delivery
See „Packing list (Register 1)”.
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
39|230
5. Product description
5.9.2
Accessories
Blade
V-blades
The standard blades (V-blades) are used for cutting and stripping. Processing with V-blades is fast because the blade position has not to be
changed between cutting and stripping. They are suitable for smaller
wires with normal requirements.
A disadvantage with these blades is that they do not exactly surround
the conductor when incising.
Radius blade (option)
The radius blades are adapted to the diameter of the conductor and
exactly surround the conductor. Radius blades are suitable for wires
with hard, thin, highly flexible or very thick insulations. Radius blades
are normally used for stripping only.
The form of the blade must exactly fit the wire conductor. For multiconductor cables, multiple radius blades are available.
Die blade (option)
The Die blades are used only for stripping. These are custom types,
adapted to both the diameter of the conductor and the outer form.
During processing these blades center the wire and exactly surround
the conductor. Damage to the conductor is impossible. They are suitable for stripping the most problematic materials (Teflon, Kynar, Wirerap) and for applications with strict specifications and safety requirements.
The setting in the "Z-axis" is determined by the automatic calibration and subsequently cannot be
changed manually.
Special blades (option)
Under this category all other blade types are found. The "Z-axis" setting can be adjusted via the software.
Universal slitting unit (option)
With the universal slitting unit it is possible to slit the wire insulation lengthwise. The slitting unit can
be selected both for end- and for window stripping. The slitting unit is designed for use with all round
wire diameters.
The universal slitting unit improves the flexibility on the OmniStrip 9450. Only one slitting blade for all
wire diameters, short changeover time and cost reduction as only one slitting blade is necessary.
The slitting operation is performed as follows:
1. The wire is transported to the point at which the slit is to commence.
2. The blade holders close to the programmed wire outer diameter. The slitting wedge is penetrating the jacket.
3. The incision depth of the slitting wedge is set exactly to the insulation thickness of the wire with
the micrometer screw.
The following restrictions have to be observed while using the slitting unit:
▄
▄
40|230
Blade grid: The universal slitting unit can only be used with a blade width of 16 mm.
Combing device: The use of the universal slitting unit together with the combing device is not
possible.
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
5. Product description
▄
Guide tubes: Using the universal slitting unit demands the use of the guide tubes with special
length, see „Parts Catalog“.
Mounting the slitting unit is equal to a standard blade, with a blade width of 16 mm, on blade position 2.
Settings for the slitting unit according to the chart below:
Wire diameter in mm
L2 (mm)
3
0.62
4
0.83
5
1.04
6
1.24
7
1.45
8
1.66
9
1.86
10
2.07
11
2.28
12
2.49
13
2.69
14
2.90
L1 = Set value of measure screw
L1 = L2 + L3
L2 = Distance blade to wire
L3 = Jacket diameter according to chart.
The slitting unit is calibrated as a special blade with a "Z-value" of 32.00 mm in the screen "Configuration - cutter head".
The diameter setting for the slit is equal to the wire diameter + 0.8 mm.
Combing device (option)
With the combing device you have the ability to process multi-conductor cables in one operation,
which would otherwise require many time-consuming processing steps.
The combing process takes place as follows:
▄
▄
Strip outer insulation.
By closing the blade holders, the exposed inner conductors are clamped between the positioning
jaws. By the help of a spring system on the combing device, the inner conductors can be clamped
at different pressure settings which at the same time prevent the inner conductors becoming
crushed (diameter setting).
The inner conductors are stripped with the multiple radius blade.
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
41|230
5. Product description
5.10
OPERATING MODES
5.10.1 Standard operation
This is the normal operating mode of the product, where wires are produced and programmed.
5.10.2 Safe mode
The machine runs into safe mode, if e. g. the initialization
process fails, the machine is in an over temperature condition
or a reliable operation generally is not guaranteed anymore.
If the OmniStrip 9450 is switched to "Safe mode", the production is inhibited fully. All motor movements are inhibited,
except the "Diagnostics - mechanic" operations.
This mode can only be suspended if performing a reboot on
the machine, which must be completed then with a successful initialization process.
42|230
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
6. Installation / first commissioning
INSTALLATION / FIRST COMMISSIONING
This chapter describes the working steps for the mounting and commissioning of the machine.
6.1
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
The installation and commissioning instructions for the product, have to be followed. The following
instructions must be followed step by step to avoid property damage on the product and to reduce
the risk of injury to the personnel to an absolute minimum.
WARNING
Observe directives!
The following work must be carried out in the listed sequence. Improper usage may lead to injury to
the user.
The following security relevant points have to be mentioned specially:
▄
▄
▄
This is a free-standing product.
The machine must only be operated in a dust free and dry area.
The electric connection must be carried out by a technical specialist and according to the local
installation regulations.
The instructions in this chapter must be carried out by qualified personnel!
6.2
SAFETY APPLIANCES
See chapter "5.4 Safety elements (Page 31)".
See chapter "5.5 Danger zones (Page 32)".
6.3
POSITIONING / MOUNTING
See chapter "4.4 Planning data (Page 25)".
6.4
CONNECTIONS
WARNING
Electric current!
Hazardous voltage is present in the area of the mains socket and the fuses
during operation, which can lead to serious injury or death.
6.4.1
Supply sources
Connection to the mains
The functioning of the OmniStrip 9450 has carefully been pre-tested before it left the factory. Thus it is
ready to operate and can be directly connected to a local mains supply.
The universal power supply of the OmniStrip 9450 automatically switches to the desired supply voltage. The permitted supply voltage ranges from 100 to 240 VAC.
1»
2»
3»
If the main switch is on, turn it off first.
If the emergency stop button is engaged, turn it CW to disengage.
Plug in the power cord to the OmniStrip 9450 and connect it to the mains.
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
43|230
6. Installation / first commissioning
Connecting compressed air (option)
The OmniStrip 9450 can be connected to a compressed air supply if the optional air jet unit is applicable.
1»
2»
3»
4»
Connect the compressed air hose to the external maintenance unit (1).
Hook up the OmniStrip 9450 to the pressure reduced connector on the maintenance unit with an
additional hose.
Adjust the pressure by pulling the setting knob up and turn it clockwise until the pressure gage
indicates a pressure of 6 bar (0.6 MPa).
After adjusting, press the setting knob downwards until it snaps in.
2
1
Fig. 10: Connecting the compressed air to the OmniStrip 9450
Connecting diagram
See chapter "20.5 Block diagram (Page 210)".
Hooking up the peripheral devices
Connect the pedal and other devices if applicable. See according manuals of peripheral devices and
chapter "13.6 Collaboration with peripheral devices (Page 124)".
6.5
SETUP
6.5.1
First switching on
1»
2»
3»
6.5.2
Turn the main switch on the OmniStrip 9450 on.
Possibly disengage the emergency stop button.
Wait until the software of the machine has been initialized.
General settings in the software
On first switching on the machine, the "Wire" screen is shown. In this screen the wires may be programmed and managed.
The user gets back to the main menu with [F1]-OK --> [F1]-CANCEL.
44|230
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
6. Installation / first commissioning
Setting the language
The language is set based on the main menu via [4]-Configuration > [2]-Machine > [7]-User interface.
Selecting the length unit
As with language.
Selecting the temperature unit
As with language.
Password
After a new machine has left the factory, „User levels“ is deactivated. The user has access to most
commands on the OmniStrip 9450. The access right is set automatically to "Maintenance".
Therefore the OmniStrip 9450 is ready for the production even if „User levels“ is deactivated.
For the user levels „Operator,“ „Programmer“ and „Maintenance“, a password can be set afterwards.
If the user level management has been activated previously, the start-up procedure is different.
6.5.3
Machine setup / blade change
Guides
1»
Set the left entry guide to the desired diameter by loosening the knurled screw (1) on
the side. The wire should be movable in the
wire guide (2) without resistance but the
guide although should not be set to large.
1
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
2
45|230
6. Installation / first commissioning
2»
Attach the swivel guide (3) to the holder
and screw on with the knurled screw (4).
Select the same diameter as for the turret
guide.
3»
Put on the right swivel guide (5) to the holder and fasten it with the knurled screw (6)
(normally select the same diameter as for
the left wire guide).
4
6
3
5
Blade
If the OmniStrip 9450 leaves the factory, a "V-Blade" is pre-mounted which is suitable for producing
common wire types. For special wires however the blade must be adapted to the wire type. Optionally up to 3 blades may be mounted simultaneously.
The OmniStrip 9450 may be equipped with different blade types. To make them operational, they
have to be declared in a table in the „Configuration“.
Menu level: 4-2-1
1»
2»
[F3]-CALIBRATION: Calibration of blade
values (demands advanced knowledge of
the machine, see chapter "17.9.1 Calibration
(Page 179)").
[F5]: Blade change.
The calibration values Zero Z and Zero Y are normally preset.
46|230
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
6. Installation / first commissioning
Configuration
1»
2»
3»
4»
5»
[F1]-OK (back to main menu, if in the "Wire" screen).
[4]-Configuration > [2]-Machine > [1]-Blades.
Select the width and the amount of blades used (depending on the blade width) from the drop
down field „Blade width“.
Select the blade type on the specific position („Type“ column).
Advance to next chapter.
Blade mounting / mechanical change
WARNING
Risk of injury!
The blades mounted on this machine have razor sharp edges, which can
cause serious injury if not handled properly during the blade change procedure.
1»
2»
[F1]-OK (back to main menu, if in the "Wire" screen).
[4]-Configuration > [2]-Machine > [1]-Blades.
Menu level: 4-2-1
3»
[F5]: Blade change (The cutter head moves
fully to the front, to gain access to the
blades).
The blades should first be defined in the configuration table before changing.
4»
Open the safety cover.
5»
For easy access to the blades, remove the
left (1) - and the right (2) wire guides.
6»
Loosen the screws (3) on the blades.
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
1
3
2
47|230
6. Installation / first commissioning
7»
Clean the blade seating (4) on the blade
holders with a brush and/or a vacuum
cleaner.
4
4
8»
Place the new blade (5) with the countersink
on the upper holder, push it to the edge
and tighten with the screw (3).
3
5
9»
Position the blade with the countersink (6)
to the lower blade holder and tighten with
the screw (3).
Caution: The blades must seat firmly in the
blade holder.
6
3
10» Close the safety cover.
11» [F1]-OK (the action may be interrupted at any time with [F7]-ABORT).
12» 3 x [F1]-OK (back to the main menu).
48|230
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
6. Installation / first commissioning
6.6
PRODUCING A TEST WIRE
Sample specification for the test wire:
Step
Quantity Material
Cut to length
10
Wire length
Stripping length Pull-off length
Strand 0.75 mm 200 mm
2
Stripping left
10 mm
5 mm
Stripping right
10 mm
5 mm
*) Due to the selected pull-off length < stripping length, the wire will only be partially stripped. The
stripped piece remains on the conductor.
200 mm
5 mm
10 mm
5 mm
10 mm
Fig. 11: The sample wire
1»
2»
3»
4»
5»
6»
7»
Mount the wire guides according to the
sample wire defaults.
Mount a V-blade.
Close the safety cover.
Switch on the machine.
Ä after initializing, the "Wire" screen is
shown first.
[F1]-OK (back to the "Wire- and Wire List
files" screen).
[4]-New.
Confirm warning "Changed data not saved"
with [F1]-OK.
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
49|230
6. Installation / first commissioning
[F3]-SINGLE WIRE.
Wire name = „Stranded 0.75 mm2“ from
previous.
10» [F1]-OK.
8»
9»
11» Select Raw Material with [@] (for this example = „mm2, stranded“).
12» Set wire cross section (for this example =
„0.75“).
13» With [ENTER] go to the left wire end and set
parameters according to the screen.
14» With [ENTER] go to the right wire end and
set parameters as well.
15» [ENTER].
To change the wire end, the following keys may
be used:
▄
▄
[EDIT] (pop- up field is shown; the wire ends
can be selected with the [ARROW KEYS] and
confirmed with [ENTER]).
[@] (The available wire ends are shown with
each key stroke consecutively, then confirm
with [ENTER]).
16» Enter all the stripping parameters in the
order according to the screen (forwards to
the next field with [ENTER]):
- Stripping length (1) right = 10 mm
- Pull-off length (2) right = 5 mm
- Stripping length left = 10 mm
- Pull-off length left = 5 mm
17» Enter the to be produced amount of wires,
for our example =10, into the field „Total".
2
1
The fields may be selected with various keys:
▄
▄
▄
[ENTER] (move to next field).
[ I< ] (move to previous field).
[ARROW KEYS] (move in all directions).
18» [F5]-DEFAULT (confirm warning "overwrite"
with [F1]-OK).
50|230
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
6. Installation / first commissioning
19» Load the wire 0.75 mm2 on the machine, see
chapter "12.1.3 Loading wire on the machine
(Page 107)".
20» [SINGLE]
Ä a sample wire will be produced.
4. Inspect the produced wire and if required
correct it again:
• Wire length (C)
• Stripping (D)
• Partial strip
• Quality of the stripping (Incision quality,
no strands damaged, no nicking (E)?, is
the wire not squeezed (F)?)
C
F
D
E
21» If the wire is OK, the selected amount can be
produced with [RUN].
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
51|230
6. Installation / first commissioning
52|230
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
7. Schleuniger wire processing concept
SCHLEUNIGER WIRE PROCESSING CONCEPT
For the programming of wires, Schleuniger follows a unified concept.
The basic design of the software is made in a way that the user is supported on the display with corresponding screens. Where applicable the user also is supported with pictograms and graphical representations. The screens are arranged in a menu structure. They are grouped according to the wire
type and the programming mode and thus they can be located easily.
The software concept of the OmniStrip 9450 is adapted to the individual demands of wire processing.
The wires can be programmed in three different ways, according to the complexity of the task and
the programmers skill of the user. The following programming modes are available:
▄
▄
▄
Simple mode: Jobs that slightly vary, e. g. single wires with common processing steps.
Library mode: Extended programming concept. For lot of individual jobs using the same Raw
Material or wires that contain special processing steps.
Wire List mode: Processing of Wire lists. For intense varying jobs, containing many or a lot of
wires.
Library mode
Simple mode
Wire List mode
Wire processing
Raw Material library
Services
Processing library
Software upgrade
Data backup
Logging
Diagnostics
7.1
Configuration
Aid for diagnostics
General machine configuration
On machine faults
All wire programs
SIMPLE MODE
This programming mode is intended for beginners. Only the screens necessary for a standard processing are visible. If jobs that slightly vary, e. g. single wires with common processing steps shall be
processed, this programming technique is best suited.
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
53|230
7. Schleuniger wire processing concept
The so called "Local Processing" used in "Simple mode" enables the user to alter existing Processing
for special needs without saving them in a library. The data of the Raw Material and the local Processing are saved directly together with the wire settings.
▄
▄
Advantage: A single wire is programmed quickly.
Disadvantage: For each wire of the same type the Raw Material and Processing settings must be
entered over and over. Changes in Raw Material and Processing also must be carried out in every
wire separately.
Wire type 1
Wire library
Raw Material
Processing
Wire type 2
Raw Material
Processing
Wire type 3
Raw Material
Processing
7.2
LIBRARY MODE
This programming mode is best suited for intense varying jobs, always using the same Raw Material
or for wires with special processing steps.
The "Library mode" finds a remedy for the disadvantages which appear in "Simple mode". In this
mode Processing- and Raw Material settings are saved in a way that individual wires can use always
the same Raw Material and Processing all over again.
All the settings for the Raw Material and Processing can be saved in a database. This only is necessary
ones for each wire type. Subsequently the entered record can be used in different wires and different
Wire Lists as often as necessary.
If a library record has to be changed it affects all the wires using this record without any further
efforts.
Thanks to this programming mode, it results in shorter programming times for wires and Wire Lists.
54|230
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
7. Schleuniger wire processing concept
Raw Material
Wire type 1
Wire library
Reference to
Raw Material
Processing
Wire type 2
Reference to
Raw Material
Processing
Wire type 3
Reference to
Raw Material
Processing
Processing
Fig. 12: Overview, „Library mode“
7.3
WIRE LIST MODE
This programming mode is best suited for intense varying jobs, containing many or a lot of wires.
A Wire List consists of a list of individual wires programmed in "Simple"- or "Library mode". The wires
are processed one after the other. The Wire List can be saved as one set and recalled later for production or for editing the list.
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
55|230
7. Schleuniger wire processing concept
Wire set 1
Wire 1 (from wire library)
Wire 2 (from wire library)
Wire List 1
Wire 3 (from wire library)
Wire set 2
Wire 1 (from wire library)
Wire List 2
Wire 2 (from wire library)
Wire set 3
Wire List X
Fig. 13: Overview, „Wire List mode“
7.3.1
Additional properties in the "Wire List mode"
An important advantage of the "Wire List mode" is that the production of a Wire List is carried out
without slug between the individual wires. The software recalculates the control of wire processing
devices placed before the blades (markers etc.).
Wire marker
Wire processing machine
Blade
Wire 1
Wire 2
Wire 3
Waste piece
Fig. 14: Wire processing without slug
56|230
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
7. Schleuniger wire processing concept
Each wire can be defined individually with the same parameters like in Simple mode:
▄
▄
▄
▄
▄
▄
▄
Wire name (e. g. the part name as used for this product within your own company).
Wire length (total length of wire).
Pull-off length (processed length on the wire ends).
Operation modes (e. g. normal stripping or slitting the jacket in length).
Production quantities (with the ability of breaking down the total into several batches).
Name of the Raw Material.
Name of the Processing.
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
57|230
7. Schleuniger wire processing concept
58|230
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
8. General handling / operation
GENERAL HANDLING / OPERATION
The operation of the machine software is described in this and the following chapters in detail (Working in "Simple mode", " Library mode", "Wire List mode" and managing wire libraries). All commands,
functions and parameters used for the wire programming are described step by step. The descriptions in this chapter shall help the user to get an in-depth understanding and shall serve as a reference to handle difficult programming tasks. See also chapter "16 Programming hints / examples
(Page 155)".
8.1
GENERAL TOPICS FOR THE OPERATION
8.1.1
Safety instructions
The instructions in this chapter must be carried out by the operator personnel!
▄
▄
▄
▄
Before the daily operation a visible check on the machine must be carried out.
Wire guides and transport units must be empty. No wires, or other objects must be left over in
this area.
The area of the blades also must be free of wire residue.
Wire guide tubes, transport units and the area of the blades must be cleaned with the enclosed
brush and/or possibly with a vacuum cleaner.
See also chapter "5.4 Safety elements (Page 31)".
8.1.2
Switching on the machine
See chapter "6.5.1 First switching on (Page 44)".
8.1.3
Switching off the machine
1»
2»
3»
8.1.4
Possibly disengage the emergency stop button.
Switch off the main switch on the back side of the machine.
Possibly interrupt the air pressure supply on the main valve (option).
Work to be done after operation
General maintenance
▄
▄
▄
After 1 day: Clean the processing area.
After 1 week: Clean the housing and the processing area.
After 1 month: Check ventilator filter.
Additional maintenance work
For further information, see chapter "17 Maintenance / maintenance schedule (Page 175)".
8.2
OVERVIEW CONTROL SOFTWARE
8.2.1
Screen layout
The screens of the OmniStrip 9450 always have the same basic layout:
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
59|230
8. General handling / operation
Header line
Input area
Tooltipp
Footer line
▄
▄
▄
▄
8.2.2
Header line: To inform the user in which screen he is working in, what type of Raw Material is
selected etc.
Input area: All the entries concerning the Processing values, wire geometry etc. are typed in here.
Help text (Tooltipp): Displays a short description of the highlighted item (tooltips are not in
every screens and fields available).
Footer line: This shows the help symbols for the function keys [F1] to [F7] and the key [F+] on
the right side of the screen. These symbols relate to the shown screen. If an arrow appears on the
left or right screen edge, the symbols can be shifted by one layer forth or back with the [F+] key.
The main menu
From here all the available screen levels of the OmniStrip 9450 can be accessed. Additionally, in the
lower area, the current time and date is shown according to the time and date format setting in the
„Configuration“.
Wire: Programming of wires or wire lists (depending on the
selected mode, see chapter "7 Schleuniger wire processing concept (Page 53)").
Raw Material library: Creating and managing Raw Material
data (only important in the Library mode), chapter "10.5 Raw
Material library (Page 95)".
Processing library: Creating and managing Processing data
(only important in the Library mode), chapter "10.6 Processing
library (Page 97)".
Configuration: Basic settings of the machine, valid for all
wire programs, chapter "13 Configuration settings (Page 113)".
Diagnostics: Monitoring the condition of the OmniStrip 9450 and the connected peripheral devices,
chapter "14 Diagnostics / troubleshooting (Page 135)".
Services: Backup and restore of data, software -upgrades on the OmniStrip 9450, chapter "15 Data
management / upgrades / services (Page 149)".
User level: Displays the user level where the user is logged in.
[F3]-LOGIN. User level management (password protection). This key is only shown if „User levels“ in
the configuration is activated, see chapter "13.4.7 User interface (Page 120)".
8.2.3
Footer line symbols
Most of the screens contain recurring footer line symbols (they are not mentioned again in the subsequent software descriptions):
60|230
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
8. General handling / operation
1
4
2
3
1
[F+] SHIFT KEY ACTIVE:
3
As soon as an arrow appears on the left and
right screen border, there is an additional
footer line (additional commands) available
and the user may move with [F+] to this footer line.
[F1] CONFIRM ENTRY:
Return to next higher screen level and save
entries.
2
[F7] DISCARD ENTRY:
Return to next higher screen level, do not
save the entries.
[F1] LEAVE SCREEN:
Go to next higher screen level.
4
Most screens contain extra symbols. For a detailed list of all available symbols in the footer lines, see
chapter "20.1 Overview of symbols (Page 193)".
8.2.4
User level management (password protection)
To prevent unauthorized handling of the OmniStrip 9450 the access on certain user levels can be
restricted by a password. With the OmniStrip 9450 it is possible to work in three different user levels.
For each level, a password may be defined.
The user logged in to a user level has only access to the commands and parameters designated for
this level. To program a wire e. g. the user must be logged in to the level „Programmer". This way he
gains access to all settings concerning the wire type (e. g. Raw Material, Processing data and blade).
The operator however can only access the production data and the general wire data like stripping
measures.
User level restrictions
The following table gives an overview, which functions can be accessed in which user level:
User level
Access restriction
Operator
▄
▄
▄
▄
▄
▄
Programmer
▄
▄
▄
▄
Run
Reset production counter
Length values (without areas)
Diameter values (incl. way back)
Changing piece counter (incl. list passes)
No save / new / manage / rename operations
Wire / Wire Lists all
Service (data backup, data restore)
Raw Material library
Processing library
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
61|230
8. General handling / operation
User level
Access restriction
Maintenance
▄
▄
▄
▄
▄
▄
▄
▄
▄
▄
▄
▄
Configuration - Blade
Configuration - Transport unit - Reference length
Configuration - Ethernet
Configuration - Pedal
Configuration - Utilities
Configuration - Production
Configuration - Clock
Configuration - Maintenance reminder
Configuration - Pre Processing / Post Processing
Diagnostics all
Services all
Password change
Initial password
After a new OmniStrip 9450 has left the factory, the following passwords are predefined (factory settings):
Operating mode
Password
Operator
1
Programmer
12
Maintenance
123
User levels (password protection) on/off
On first switching on the OmniStrip 9450, "User levels" is deactivated normally, and the user has access
to all commands and functions.
When the user levels function is switched off, automatically the level „Maintenance“ is active.
Menu level: 4-2-8
To activate the password protection, go to the main menu >
[4]-Configuration > [2]-Machine > [8]-User levels (if in the
„Wire“ screen, press [F1] 2 x).
User levels: (Yes/No) Here the user level management can
be switched on or off.
For additional information on the configuration of the user
levels, see chapter "13.4.9 User levels/password protection
(Page 121)".
After „User levels“ has been activated, passwords can be
defined or existing ones reset to factory default. In the level
the user resides, he must type in the corresponding password before activating „User levels“.
62|230
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
8. General handling / operation
Logging into a user level
After „User levels“ has been activated, the „Login“ screen is shown during start up of the
OmniStrip 9450 where the user can define, in which user level he intends to work:
Current level: Displays the current selected level.
Level: (Operator/Programmer/Maintenance) This defines the
level where the user intends to work in.
Password: Here the password of the current level must be
entered. Either the previous entered- or the initial password
must be entered.
Change password
To change a password, go to the main menu > [4]-Configuration > [2]-Machine > [8]-User levels >
[F3]-CHANGE PASSWORD (if in the „Wire“ screen, press [F1] 2 x).
Menu level: 4-2-8
Before changing a password, the initial- or the previously
defined password must be entered.
Forgotten Password
In case you cannot remember the „Maintenance“ password, contact your local dealer or if not available the Schleuniger customer service.
8.2.5
Wire and Wire List files
In this screen wires- and Wire Lists are created from scratch, loaded, saved, renamed and managed;
see also chapter "16 Programming hints / examples (Page 155)".
Go to the "Wire" screen
Select the wire list
Display of the currently loaded wire
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
63|230
8. General handling / operation
Selection screen for „Wire and Wire List“ file operations
The list contains single wire and Wire List items. It is arranged similar for all file operations.
Meaning of keys and symbols:
1
2
3
4
4
3
2
1
Wire type (single wire/Wire List).
Write protection
With [F2] selected entries
Entry of the file name
[F1] Go to next screen. Load wire (only with
„New“ and „Load“).
[F2]: Select wire (only shown in the "Manage"
screen).
[F3]: Protect the selected wire from overwriting.
[F4]: Select/deselect all wires (depending on
the wire highlighted in the list).
[F5]. Screen font larger / smaller.
[F6]: Delete selected wires.
[F7]: Convert the wire data to the actual format (only shown in "Manage" screen).
[F+]: Additional footer line commands (only shown in "Manage" screen).
The files in the Wire List can be protected against overwriting. A protected wire is marked in the list in
the left column with a locker symbol.
To identify if it is a single wire or a Wire List file is indicated in the third column.
[F+][F3]: Export of selected Processing data to the USB memory stick.
[F+][F5]: Import of selected wire data from the USB memory
stick.
File operations
While typing in the file name keep in mind to only enter characters in the ASCII range of 1 to 127.
(Invalid characters are: \\ / : * ? \ „ < > | and all non-English ones).
Process/produce current
Go directly to the „Wire or Wire List“ screen. The „Wire“ or „Wire List“ screen is shown and the wire can
directly be produced or settings being changed from here.
64|230
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
8. General handling / operation
Screen Wire
Screen "Wire List"
Save current
The wire or the Wire List will be saved. It can be saved at any time (also when a production run was
not completed), and the work continued later. Even a Wire List without wires can be saved, to e. g.
save the properties of the Wire List. A message "Wire has been saved" follows. Confirm the message
with [F1]-OK .
Save current as
The wire or the Wire List will be saved under a new name. The screen "Wire": "Save“ screen is shown
and the user can type in a new wire name in the entry field below. After this, the saved wire or Wire
List is loaded directly.
New
Creates a new wire or a wire list. If a wire or a Wire List was previously edited, the user is requested to
save it before proceeding. After confirming with [F1]-OK the software asks if a single wire or a wire list
shall be created.
After the according selection [F3]-SINGLE WIRE or [F5]WIRE LIST, The screen "Wire": "New" is shown where in the
lower entry field a new name can be typed in. After confirming with [F1]-OK The user automatically gets to the screen
"Wire" or "Wire list".
If selecting an existing wire and confirming with [F1]-OK a
warning message is shown "The file already exists and if it
should be overwritten".
Load
Loads an existing wire or Wire List. If previously a different wire or Wire List was edited, the user is
asked "If he wants to save this file before proceeding". After this the screen "Wire": "Load" is shown
where the desired wire can be selected with the navigation keys. After confirming with [F1]-OK the
according "Wire" or "Wire List" screen is shown.
A special feature here is the built in search function. Especially with long lists the user can type in
merely the beginning letters of the wire name. Thereby the first row in the list, corresponding to the
typed in letters from left to right is searched and selected then.
Rename
The wire or Wire List file will be renamed. The screen "Wire": "Rename of“ is shown, the user can select
the wire to be renamed with the navigation keys. After pressing [F1-OK] the screen "Wire":. "Rename
to" is shown. Change the name in the entry field below and press [F1-OK].
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
65|230
8. General handling / operation
Manage
To organize wires or Wire Lists. One or several wires or Wire Lists can be locked or deleted here. After
the screen "Wire": "Manage" is displayed, the selected entries can be marked with [F2] and the
desired operation be carried out.
With [F7] the with [F2] selected wire data can be converted to the actual ones. This may be necessary
in case the processing of the software is slowed down or if a software upgrade has previously be performed on the OmniStrip 9450.
Files not write protected will not be converted. The write protection must be turned off first.
Caution, data loss! If the data are converted, they cannot be used anymore on an OmniStrip 9450
with an older software revision loaded.
We recommend, data not to be converted (e. g. for archiving reasons) to write protect before.
Data export
With [F+][F3] the with [F2] selected wire data can be exported to an USB memory stick. Here also,
either the selected wire data only can be imported, or the import file can include the Raw Material
and Processing data as well.
Entry of the file name for the export file. As default, the system submits a file name (date, machine name).
Already on the USB memory stick saved files can be deleted
again with [F6]. For this, the corresponding file must be
selected in the file list with the navigation keys first.
[F1] Only the selected data in the wire list including the write
protected are exported.
[F3]-PASSWORD As above, but including the corresponding
Raw Material and Processing data. This type of export is slow
as the system needs to search the exported wires.
[F5]-ALL. As above, but including the complete Raw Material
and Processing database.
Data import
With [F+][F5] previously exported wire data can be imported from an USB memory stick. Also here,
either the selected wire data only can be imported, or the import file can include the Raw Material
and Processing data as well, see „Data export”. If the file to be imported already exists, a warning message shows up.
From this machine only / show all machines: Either the
data which are saved by this machine or from other
machines including data from the wire processing software
Cayman can be shown.
Cayman data can only be produced if on the machine in the
USB slot a Cayman-Dongle is plugged in.
The folder on the USB memory stick must be named exactly
„Cayman_Export\OS9450”. Additionally the Cayman
data must be programed as OmniStrip 9450 data (a message
reminds the user).
66|230
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
8. General handling / operation
Show only exports / Show also backups: Either the export data only or even the data from complete data backups can be shown.
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
67|230
8. General handling / operation
68|230
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
9. Simple programming mode
SIMPLE PROGRAMMING MODE
The OmniStrip 9450 can, as described already, be programmed in different modes. Here all the important basic settings for the programming in "Simple mode" are described. The description for the other
modes contains only supplementary explanations.
In the wire editor all wire settings are carried out. This screen is the so called central operating platform, where the user gains access to all wire settings available in his user level (wire type, length,
stripping parameters and others).
9.1
GRAPHIC OVERVIEW "SIMPLE MODE"
Main menu
User management
Login
File menu
Wire library
Wire
Processing
Feed
Cut
Options
Elements
Application
Processing
Area
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
69|230
9. Simple programming mode
9.2
„WIRE“ SCREEN
9.2.1
Overview
1
2
3
1 Production data
2 General wire settings
3 Raw Material
[F2]-APPLICATION: Define area and step applications.
[F3]: Reset production counter ("Produced" = 0).
[F5]-DEFAULT: Set default values.
[F6]: Processing values for feed, cut, elements
and options.
[F+]: Further footer line commands.
[F+][F6]: Switch to "Library mode" and back.
[F+][F2]-COMMENTS: Notice area for wire comments. Here
general remarks, remarks before production and remarks
after production can be entered.
9.2.2
Dimensioning
The wire length, stripping types- and length are programmed with the help of the graphical screen
layout where the wire is represented.
Following a sample for dimensioning:
By means of the dimensioning arrows above the cable picture, it is stated which meaning the digits below the graphics
represent. In addition the tooltip describes which meaning
the currently selected measure has.
In the set up sample the figure „20.0” describes the left stripping position, i. e. the position viewed from the left wire ending where the blades incise the insulation.
70|230
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
9. Simple programming mode
9.2.3
Production data
The production data inform the user about the amount of wires to be produced and during production how far it is advanced.
Total count of pieces: Total, produced, batch on / off, batch
size, remaining
▄
▄
▄
▄
▄
▄
9.2.4
Total: Here the quantity of wires to be produced is
entered.
Produced: Shows how many wires of the total quantity
have already been produced.
If the total is reached, the production counter must be
reset with [F3] before continuing production. In this case
a message appears.
Batch/batch off: The "Total" is either divided in partial
jobs or it is performed continuously (Batch off). If "Batch on" is selected here, an additional entry
field is shown to the right to enter the batch size.
Remaining: Shows how many wires still remain until the "Total" has been reached.
Batch Left: Shows how many wires still remain until the Batch has been completed (shown only if
"Batch" is switched on).
Batch cycle: Actual list cycle (only available in list mode).
Default [F5]
After the Raw Material for the wire in production has been defined, with [F5]-DEFAULT, the user can
let the OmniStrip 9450 calculate the necessary data (Processing) automatically. This automatic setting
is adequate for most standard wires and to have an error free production. If, however e. g. the outer
jacket diameter differs from the standard value, the Processing values must be altered with [F6]-PROCESSING accordingly.
9.2.5
General wire settings
▄
▄
Wire length: Length where the wire to be produced has to be cut to.
Left / right wire end: This defines the wire ends. The user selects the method, how the wire ends
shall be produced. The selection of the wire end depends on the type of Raw Material and which
production mode the user is working in.
Not all wire-end types can be applied with each Raw Material.
Following a description of the possible selections for wire ends in "Simple mode":
No stripping
In this wire ending type, the Raw Material is not stripped, no
stripping operation is performed. The wire is solely cut to the
programmed length.
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
71|230
9. Simple programming mode
Full strip
Adds a plain full strip. The strip always takes place on the outermost removable layer.
Suitable for removing the jacket of power cords or for stripping the insulation from simple 2-layer wires. If the pull-off
length is > the stripping length, a full strip is performed.
20.0 = Stripping length
25.0 = Pull-off length
Partial strip
Adds a plain partial strip. The strip always takes place on the
outermost removable layer.
Suitable for removing the jacket of power cords or for stripping the insulation from simple 2-layer wires. If the pull-off
length is < the stripping length, a partial strip is performed.
20.0 = Stripping length
10.0 = Pull-off length
Window strip
This function is suitable for single strip and window strip.
With tough insulations, a special blade may be used for slitting.
20.0 = Stripping length
10.0 = Pull-off length
30.0 = Window position
5.0 = Window length
Power cord
Suitable for wires with more than one conductor e. g. power
cords. Here, first the jacket is stripped completely, then the
wires are placed side by side using the optional combing
device and finally they are stripped with a multiple radius
blade.
8.0 = Stripping length
6.0 = Pull-off length
30.0 = Jacket stripping length
Copy wire end settings
Copy all the end settings from the opposite end to the selected one. This also copies all the Processing values.
This way one end can be programmed and as soon as all settings are verified, it can be copied to the other side.
72|230
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
9. Simple programming mode
9.2.6
Raw Material
In the OmniStrip 9450 a fixed selection of programmed Raw
Materials for selection is available.
The chart gives an overview of the available Raw Materials.
The Raw Material name in the left column is reserved.
Description
Definition
AWG solid
Raw Material is defined as American Wire Gauge with solid wire.
AWG stranded
Raw Material defined as "American Wire Gauge" as stranded wire.
mm solid
Raw Material defined as conductor diameter in mm² with solid wire.
mm2 stranded
Raw Material defined as conductor diameter in mm² as stranded wire.
Power cord
Here the user determines the diameters himself. When invoking the Raw Material "Power cord", the measurements to be typed in are represented graphically.
2
A
B
Ø diameter
D
(A) - Wire diameter
(B) - Jacket inner diameter
(C) Outer diameter of the insulation of a single wire
(D) Diameter of a single wire
Here the user determines the inner and outer diameter himself. When invoking
the direct measurement, the inner and outer diameter measure, is graphically
shown.
A
B
9.3
C
(A) - Wire diameter
(B) - Jacket inner diameter
„APPLICATION - WIRE END“ SCREEN
In this screen additional details to the wire can be entered. There are two types of applications, namely "Area" and "Wire end" applications. For the "Wire end- application" there are different variants
(defaults), which can depending on the wire type cut down entries. Be sure to select the tool best
suited for the current wire, respectively the current task. The steps are generated depending on the
quantity of layers of the wire.
Each element of the operation has the following fields:
Local Processing element: If a wire symbol is shown (as in
the screenshot), this stripping is processed like the rest of this
wire. If an element of the application is shown as with the slitting symbol in the footer, it is processed in a different way.
This different procedure can be defined by pressing [F6].
Position: This describes the start position of the application
element, e. g. the beginning of the slitting.
Length: This describes the length of the application element,
e. g. the length to be slit.
[F2]-END SELECTION: Select the wire end to be altered.
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
73|230
9. Simple programming mode
[F6]-PROCESSING: Changes directly to the screen "Processing".
9.3.1
No stripping
No parameters can be entered in this mode.
9.3.2
Partial strip and full strip
The first group describes in this order the values for the left or
right wire end:
▄
▄
Stripping length
Pull-off length
The second group defines in this order, if the insulation has to
be slit and if so, if this is performed before stripping or after:
▄
▄
9.3.3
The start position of the slit
The length of the slit
Window strip
The first and the last group are known from partial strip
above; the second group of values defines in this order the
stripping of the window:
▄
▄
9.3.4
The start position of the window strip
The length of the window
Multi-conductor cable (power cord)
The first group defines in this order the full strip of the jacket:
▄
▄
Stripping length (position)
Pull-off length
The second block consists of only one value and defines the
starting position of the combing.
The third group defines the stripping of the inner conductors
in this order:
▄
▄
Stripping length (position)
Pull-off length
The last block defines the slitting as described above.
74|230
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
9. Simple programming mode
9.4
„APPLICATION - AREA“ SCREEN
Areas are implemented for marking the wire with a HotStamp, Inkjet- or Thermal transfer printer.
9.4.1
Activate area application
To be able to work with areas, an area must be activated first. Therefore the "Application - Area"
screen has to be selected with ([F2]-APPLICATION > [F4]-AREA).
[F4]-ADD: The area application is activated, the first area is
added.
If no wire end is selected yet, the user is directed with [F2]APPLICATION directly to this screen.
This displays the area where the user is residing in.
[F3]: One area backwards (if more than one area has been
defined).
[F5]. One area further (if more than one area has been
defined).
[F+]: Display additional area functions (Add / Delete area).
9.4.2
Add/delete an area
A wire can be marked with many different markers on different positions, but the user can use different marking devices in parallel as well. Therefore an additional area screen is provided for each marking device or in case of marking a wire measured from the left or the right end. All settings e. g. position or quantity can be independently set in each area.
With [F+] the user shifts to a second layer of the footer line where a new area can be defined or other
managing functions be performed:
[F+][F2]: Add an additional area.
[F+][F3]-BEFORE: Position the selected area in the order,
before.
[F+][F5]-AFTER: Position the selected area in the order, after.
[F+][F6]-DELETE: Delete the selected area.
9.4.3
General settings
List of general machine settings valid for all wire marking devices:
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
75|230
9. Simple programming mode
HotStamp
Printing the wire by use of a hot stamp unit. A wire marker
device must be connected therefore.
Inkjet-/thermal transfer printer
Marking the wire with an Inkjet- or Thermal transfer printer.
An Inkjet- or Thermal transfer printer device must be connected therefore.
[F4]-PROPERTIES: Setting the font style (This function key is
only shown if "Inkjet printer" is selected).
None:
Temporarily deactivates the area application.
1. Position: The position of the first marking is measured
towards the wire end.
1. Position - reference: The first position is referenced in this
entry field. The display for the left or right end can be toggled.
Device: (None / HotStamp / Inkjet 1 / Inkjet 2 / Thermal Transfer). The decision as to which device is set is dependent on
the wire Processing system. The setting "None" can be used
when no marker is available, but the programmed positions of the areas are not to be lost.
The machine would not permit production with an Inkjet printer set in an area, but physically not
present.
Entry method: To produce repetitive markings, the three different modes "Distance, last Position" / "Distance quantity" / "Last position, quantity" (from left / from right) are available.
1. Position
Last position (from left/from right)
4
3
1
2
Distance
Quantity of markings
Fig. 15: Positions of the areas
76|230
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
9. Simple programming mode
To define the area clearly, only two of the three possible input parameters - „Distance“, „Last position“, „Quantity“ - have to be entered. The program calculates the third parameter automatically from
the two entered parameters. If the entry method is changed, the disabled edit field is enabled and the
next one is disabled. The values are retained.
Distance: Distance between two marks. Calculation formula:
Distance =
(last position - first position)
(Quantity - 1)
Last position (from left / from right): Position of the last mark. Calculation formula:
Last position (from left / from right) = first position + (quantity-1) x distance
Quantity: Quantity of marks. Calculation formula:
Quantity = 1 +
(last position - first position)
Distance
With the entry method „Distance, last position” the last position is only printed if it meets exactly the
position „first position + ((quantity -1) x distance)". This means the last position is the max. allowable
position.
9.4.4
Settings for HotStamp devices
Text: If in device mode "None" is selected, this edit field disappears. If „HotStamp“ has been selected,
the text to be printed on the wire is entered here. With the HotStamp device, this input serves only for
the representation on the screen and as a demand to set the correct text on the HotStamp, since with
the HotStamp the text to be printed has to be set manually. To do so a stop condition may be selected, see chapter "13 Configuration settings (Page 113)".
Color: To define the color set up on the HotStamp it is selected from the drop down field. If two wires
with different colors have to be marked, the sealing sheet of the HotStamp device must be changed.
For this a stop condition can be selected.
With a text or color change, an appropriate message is shown if in Wire List - Properties, „Adapt HotStamp” is set to „Message”.
9.4.5
Settings for Inkjet printer devices
For the printing there are several properties available (these properties are always set for the complete printing operation).
To make a single word to be shown in bold, select "@6 toggle bold" (see below).
Text: If „Inkjet“ is selected, the text to be printed on the wire is entered here. The Inkjet printer on the
other hand, directly receives the text from the OmniStrip 9450 and prints it on the wire.
"Area - Properties" screen: With [F4]-PROPERTIES, the user
enters the "Inkjet properties" screen“, where all the parameters like font size, color etc. can be typed in.
▄
▄
Font size: The selected font size is submitted to the Inkjet printer, where the printing can be executed in this
size.
Take care to only enter font sizes which are supported by
the printer! Common sizes are 5, 7, 11(12) and 15(16).
Color: Currently not in use.
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
77|230
9. Simple programming mode
▄
▄
Additional font settings: In the following screen lines the user can switch on or off additional
font properties but they only show up if they are supported by the connected printer device.
Start counter: Defines the start value of the field "Counter start". As the name states, this counter
is increased by one after each produced wire.
Predefined variable fields can be entered. To do so, the cursor must be positioned in the text entry
field on the desired position while the second footer line is set with [F+]. To enter the variable press
[F4]-@TEXT. Select the corresponding digit in the list.
The following predefined fields are available:
@1: Time (Prints the actual system time in the format predefined in the „Configuration“)
@2: Date (Prints the actual system date in the format predefined in the „Configuration“).
@3: Total produced (prints the amount of wires produced).
@4: Batch produced (prints the amount of batches already
produced).
@5: Counter (uses the "Counter start" edit field)
@6: Toggle bold (All following letters are shown in bold/
normal).
@7: Wire name (Prints the predefined wire name).
9.4.6
Settings for thermal transfer printer
Text: The text to be printed on the wire is entered here. With the Thermal transfer printer device, this
input serves only for the representation on the screen or for the transfer to the wire processing software Cayman, since with the Thermal transfer printer the text to be printed has to be set manually or
via Cayman.
There is no „Properties” screen available with Thermal transfer printers.
9.5
„PROCESSING - FEED“ SCREEN
This defines all settings according to the feed operation.
[F3]-ELEMENTS: Go to „Processing - elements“ screen.
[F5]-CUT: Go to „Processing - cut“ screen.
[F6]-OPTIONS: Go to „Processing - option“ screen.
[F+]: Display more footer line commands for the „Processing feed".
[F+][F2]-%CALCULATOR: Go to „%-Correction“ screen.
[F+][F3]-DEFAULT: Set default values (as in the screen
"Wire")
[F+][F5]-SAVE AS: Save processing data under a new name.
78|230
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
9. Simple programming mode
9.5.1
%-correction
Global length correction. Length variations can occur due to the wire material characteristics. For this
the global %-correction is implemented. If the user knows the nature of a wire and are aware that
lengths are produced uniformly too long or too short, he can make a global correction here. By pressing the [F+] key the next footer level is shown. The %-correction can be calculated automatically by
the OmniStrip 9450. For this, press "%-Calculator" (press [F2]-%CALCULATOR). Enter the desired and
measured length, and confirm your entries with [F1]-OK. The calculated value will be passed on to
the edit field "%-Correction".
The formula for the "%-Correction" is:
New correction factor = old correction factor x
given value of wire length
value of wire length
If in the field %-Correction another value than 100 % has been entered, the „%”-sign is shown in the
wire screen.
9.5.2
Speed/ramp (acceleration)
These settings change the feeding speed and the ramp (acceleration) of the transport belts; whereas
0 is the smallest and 9 the largest selectable value.
9.5.3
Gap, left
Distance between the transport belts. This value determines the distance in-between the left transport belts. This distance also is influenced by the values pressure left and strip pressure left. The
entered diameter must be somewhat smaller than the wire diameter. (rule of thumb: 1 mm smaller
than the outer diameter)
9.5.4
Gap, right
This value determines the distance between the right transport belts. This distance also is affected by
the values pressure right and strip pressure right. The entered diameter must be somewhat smaller
than the wire diameter. (rule of thumb: 1 mm smaller than the outer diameter)
9.5.5
Pressure, left
Force applied by the transport belts. The pressure left is the force applied to the wire by the left transport belts during feeding (contact pressure).
9.5.6
Pressure, right
The pressure right is the force applied to the wire by the right transport belts during feeding (contact
pressure).
9.5.7
Strip pressure, left/right
Force applied by the transport belts. The strip pressure left is the force with which the wire is clamped
by the left transport belts during the stripping operation.
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
79|230
9. Simple programming mode
Pressure
9
Thick wires, firm insulation
1
Thin wires, supple insulation
0
thin, supple
Thick, rigid
Fig. 16: Set strip pressure
9.5.8
Strip pressure, left/right
The strip pressure right is the force with which the cable is clamped by the right transport belts during the stripping process.
Note that you can lose time while producing with different pressure- and strip pressure-settings,
because the motors between wire feeding and stripping process has to move to another position.
9.5.9
Long end gap
Different gap for the right transport belts. This dimension is required when the stripping length is
greater than the distance between the blades and the right hand transport belts. The right hand
transport belts open slightly during pull-off. This ensures that the belts do not press on the conductor, which would result in faulty stripping. A diameter should be set which is approx. 1 mm larger
than the wire diameter.
9.6
„PROCESSING - CUT“ SCREEN
All data concerning cutting movements during pull-off are entered here.
[F2]-FEED: Go to „Processing - feed“ screen.
[F3]-ELEMENTS: Go to „Processing - elements“ screen.
[F6]-OPTIONS: Go to „Processing - option“ screen.
[F+]: Display more footer line commands for the „Processing feed" screen.
[F+][F3]-DEFAULT: Set default values (as in the screen
"Wire")
[F+][F5]-SAVE AS: Save processing data under a new name.
80|230
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
9. Simple programming mode
9.6.1
Speed/ramp (acceleration)
These settings change the feeding speed and the ramp (acceleration) of the blades, whereas 0 is the
smallest and 9 the largest selectable value.
9.6.2
Blade
This defines the blade type used and the blade position. Here the selection of the blades assigned to
the machine with its associated position can be selected.
9.6.3
Intersect
Depending on the type of the blade and the material being processed, the blades intersect when cutting through a wire (default value = 0.5 mm). The traversing path can be defined here.
9.6.4
Position
While feeding
During feeding, the blades return to their home position defined here. This value must be sufficiently
large enough to ensure that the wire is not damaged during feeding. On the other hand, the position
should not be set too large to prevent a long blade movement. For the blade positions during stripping refer to "Diameter" and "Way back" .
Home position
Incision
Way back
Cut
Fig. 17: Position of blades while feeding
*) With a blade change, the blades open to the value: X > wire diameter
While blade change
Home position during feeding. It is important that this value is selected large enough or the wire will
jam and the blades could break. For the blade positions during stripping refer also to "Diameter" and
"Way back" .
NOTICE
Caution, property damage!
The blades must open far enough to avoid a wire jam and breaking the
blades.
9.6.5
Cut with long end gap
(On/off). When cutting stiff wires they can block the blades if they are clamped hard by the feed belts.
To prevent this, the right belts can be opened to the long end gap position during cutting.
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
81|230
9. Simple programming mode
9.6.6
Processing comment
Here a comment can be entered when the Processing has to be changed. It can be switched on or off
under "11.5 „Wire List Properties“ Screen (Page 103)".
9.7
„PROCESSING - OPTIONS“ SCREEN
This sets all the data for the feeding and the behavior when executing a full strip on the right wire
end and the connected Post Processing devices.
[F2]-FEED: Go to „Processing - feed“ screen.
[F3]-ELEMENTS: Go to „Processing - elements“ screen.
[F4]-CUT: Go to „Processing - cut“ screen.
[F+]: Display more footer line commands for the „Processing option" screen.
[F+][F5]-SAVE AS: Save processing data under a new name.
9.7.1
Left step - pull back
(Save/fast/safe with length). This option is used to prevent the wire from being bent by the swivel
guide. The wire is removed from the guide tube depending on the value set, before it is pivoted
upwards. 134 mm corresponds to complete.
This option is suitable for the treatment of rigid cables.
▄
▄
▄
9.7.2
Safe: The wire is pulled back for a certain value first, and then the swivel guide tube moves up.
Fast: The wire is pulled back for a certain value and simultaneously the swivel guide moves up
(fast production, works in most cases with short wires).
Safe with length: The wire is pulled back for the value "Pull back length" and then the left swivel
guide tube moves up.
Pull back length: 134 mm corresponds to complete.
Right full strip
(Blades only/Blades and belts) Defines a full strip on the right wire end. Full strips on the right wire
end must be specially handled since, depending on length, the waste piece can jam between the
right hand wire guide and the right hand transport belts. To prevent this, the waste piece can be
pulled off and ejected with the right hand transport belts.
82|230
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
9. Simple programming mode
▄
Blades only: A full strip takes place
without the assistance of the right
hand transport belts.
Waste piece
▄
9.7.3
Blades + belts:
If stripping position >: If the full
strip is larger than the length selected here, the slug is pulled off and
ejected by the right hand transport
belts - otherwise the stripping is
done by the blades only.
With belts: The part of the stripping
performed by the belts.
Waste piece
Short mode
(Automatic/manual). The "Short mode" can be invoked either automatically or manually.
Distance: blades - transport belts
54
The stroke guide moves away
The short piece of wire is ejected between the right transport belts and the blades
▄
▄
Automatic: If after processing the insulation piece remaining on the wire is shorter than the
selected value in the configuration table ("Configuration - machine - production - short mode
from..."), the short mode is activated. Producing in short mode, integrates all operations from the
left side to the right side. The right guide is swiveled out, the right transport belts open to the
value "Long end gap" and the processed wire drops out of the machine in-between the blades
and the right belts.
Manual: While invoking the short mode manually, the behavior of the machine can be determined exactly.
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
83|230
9. Simple programming mode
Conversion: (On / Off) Determines if the operations of the left side should be converted to the
right side. Certain requirements must be fulfilled for the conversion, otherwise an error message
occurs:- Only mode "Stripping" used- Direction: To the end- Same layers and branches- No operations "Stripping with window".
Right guide out: Defines if the right guides swivels out and the right transport belts open.
9.7.4
Strip compensation
Because of executing the left side strip to the right hand side, it can occur that the insulation gets
stretched slightly during production. This sometimes causes a small piece of insulation to be left over
on the left end of the wire. To prevent this, a value > 0 can be entered in the „strip compensation“ field. All the left stripping is shifted to the left by this value. This compensation is available in
"Short mode - auto and manual".
9.7.5
Post processing mode
(Configuration/Processing). This defines if the Post Processing
device is controlled basically by the „Configuration“ or the
„Processing“. Settings are only available in the mode "Processing".
9.8
„PROCESSING - ELEMENTS" SCREEN
In this screen all the settings for the operations of the cutter head are made. Strip, comb, slit, separate,
shorten.
[F2]-FEED: Go to „Processing - feed“ screen.
[F4]-CUT: Go to „Processing - cut“ screen.
[F6]-OPTIONS: Go to „Processing - option“ screen.
[F+]: Display more footer line commands for the „Processing elements".
[F+][F3]-DEFAULT: Set default values (as in the screen
"Wire")
[F+][F5]-SAVE AS: Save processing data under a new name.
[F+][F6]-LOCAL: Set elements to local.
84|230
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
9. Simple programming mode
9.8.1
Blade
This defines the type and the position of the desired blades. As blade types, only the blades defined
under "Configuration - machine - blades" are shown. If a blade is selected which is not listed in the
"Configuration", the name is shown in brackets.
9.8.2
Diameter
The above selected blade is closed to this diameter during production.
9.8.3
Incision pause [ms]
On certain insulations it is helpful to wait a specified time after the incision. Thus the insulation is cut
properly. This waiting time can be defined with the „Incision pause". With extremely flexible materials, a longer pause results in proper cuts.
Proper stripping
9.8.4
Improper stripping
Way back
After the incision, the blades travel back by the stated value, in order not to damage the inner layers
during pull-off.
9.8.5
Speed/ramp (acceleration)
These settings change the feeding speed and the ramp (acceleration) of the stripping action, whereas
0 is the smallest and 9 the largest selectable value.
9.8.6
Discard
(On/off). With a full strip, the stripped insulation sometimes adheres to the blades. If „Discard“ is selected, the blades perform a cleaning movement after a full strip. This is done by cutting through the
slug fully.
9.8.7
Air jet [ms]
The slug is blown away with the optional Air jet. Enter 0 here to disable this function.
9.8.8
Stripping mode
(Simple/regrip)
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
85|230
9. Simple programming mode
▄
Regrip: Protects the conductor from being damaged.
[+][F4]-PROPERTIES. Settings for the "Regrip" function.
▄
Properties - regrip:
Break length: Length used to break the insulation.
Strip offset: Offset used for the "Regrip" position.
Pull-off diameter: Diameter used for the "Regrip" function.
Function
Representation
Description
Break length
Length used to break the insulation.
Strip offset
Offset used for the "Regrip" position.
Strip diameter
Diameter used for the "Regrip" function.
With "Regrip" activated, the procedure is as follows:
1. Incision and way back (Ø 1.17)
2. Breaking while feeding „Break length“ = 5.0 mm
3. Open
86|230
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
9. Simple programming mode
4. Regrip with cable transport for „strip offset“ =
2.0 mm
5. Strip to „Stripping diameter“ = Ø1.52 mm
9.9
„WIRE COMMENTS” SCREEN
Here general remarks to the produced wires can be entered. This comments are valid for single wires
as well as for Wire Lists. The field „Remark” can be treated as notice area but is not output automatically. The data can be transferred between the OmniStrip 9450 and the wire processing software Cayman.
If a Wire List has to be produced, the „Wire comments” can be switched on and off globally.
Remark: (On/off) General comments about the wire type and
others .
▄
Entering a comment in the field below.
Comment before production: (On/off) Displays a comment
before a new wire type is produced the first time.
▄
Entering a comment in the field below.
Comment after production (On/off) Displays a comment
after a specific wire type has been produced.
▄
Entering a comment in the field below.
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
87|230
9. Simple programming mode
88|230
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
10. Library mode
LIBRARY MODE
10.1
OVERVIEW, „LIBRARY MODE“
The basic difference in the Library mode is that the Raw Material and Processing can be selected from
libraries previously applied. Alternatively the Processing can still be saved local just for the wire in use.
In the following overview graphic we only show the additional screens to the Library mode. See also
"9.1 Graphic overview "Simple mode" (Page 69)".
Main menu
Library
Raw Material
File menu
Library
Processing
Wire
Processing
Raw Material
Application
Custom ends
Feed
Cut
Options
Elements
further elements
10.2
„WIRE“ SCREEN
A new key in the Library mode [F4]-RAW MATERIAL appears, where the Raw Material can be edited
and renamed directly without passing through the main menu.
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
89|230
10. Library mode
[F4]-RAW MATERIAL: Directly edit the Raw Material.
[F5]: Completing of layer/mode combinations (Processing
elements) used in operations in the Processing - elements. A
message is shown "Processing is saved locally".
[F+]: Display more footer line commands for the „Wire"
screen.
Selecting an existing Raw Material and Processing from a
library.
[F+][F6]: Toggle simple-/Library mode.
The Library mode offers an additional End processing, called „Custom end“. This way also multi-step
stripping can be performed.
"Custom end" production
Which ends are shown, depends on the selected Raw Material. If "Custom end" is selected, only "Copy end" and "No strip"
are displayed
With [F5] layer/mode combinations (Processing elements)
used in applications in the "Processing - elements" screen
can be completed. A warning message is shown up if the
missing layers are not entered properly or if they are not
completed with [F5].
[F5]-DEFAULT: (to calculate the Processing values based on
the Raw Material) is not available in this form in the Library mode.
10.2.1 Switching to "Library mode"
The screens of the two modes mainly differ in the way the Raw Material is shown. Furthermore the
Processing in the "Simple mode" is set local; in the "Library mode" it can be selected from the library
or transferred directly from the setting in the Raw Material.
Single wire - simple mode
90|230
Single wire - Library mode
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
10. Library mode
With [F+][F6] the mode can be easily toggled. While switching from "Library mode" to "Simple
mode", a warning message is shown "Processing in this mode must be local". Contrary the local Processing is discarded as soon as an existing Raw Material or Processing is selected in Library mode.
10.2.2 „Raw Material“ screen
All available Raw Materials can be saved in the Raw Material library. This only is necessary ones for
each Raw Material. This way the entered record can be used in different wires and different Wire Lists
as often as necessary.
The user can access the "Raw Material" screen with [F4]. Here the Raw Material type, the corresponding Processing and other settings can be defined. Depending on the type of Raw Material more or
less settings are shown.
[F6]-SAVE AS: The altered Raw Material can be directly saved
under a new name to the Raw Material library from here.
The selected name will be taken over into the actual wire as
actual reference.
▄
▄
▄
▄
▄
▄
▄
▄
10.3
Type: (Discrete/Power cord/Custom wire). Definition of
the Raw Material type.
Preferred Processing: Selecting the Processing from the
library which is linked then to this Raw Material.
Amount of layers: Defines the quantity of layers correlating with this Raw Material. Can only be edited if "Custom wire" is selected.
Outer diameter: Diameter of the wire.
Inner diameter: Inner diameter of the jacket.
Insulation diameter: Diameter of the insulation of a single wire on power cords.
Conductor diameter: Diameter of the inner wires of a single conductor on power cords.
Raw Material comment: Here a Raw Material change comment can be entered. It can be switched on or off.
SCREEN „APPLICATION“
10.3.1 Simple strip
See chapter "9.3 „Application - wire end“ screen (Page 73)".
10.3.2 Custom ends
If "Simple ends" are not adequate „Custom ends“ can be used. This way all the options of the end
processing can be utilized.
The wire can be programmed directly as „Custom end“. If it is switched to "Custom ends" after it was
programmed with "Simple ends", all settings from there are carried over. The preset steps and settings calculated by the machine can be viewed and edited in the "Application" screen. This is a programming aid for beginners, to gain a better understanding of the "Step programming". In the "Application" screen operation steps are added or deleted.
Example of a multi-step stripping operation. The wire is produced here with several steps:
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
91|230
10. Library mode
4.
3.
1.
2.
Fig. 18: Example, multi-step stripping
The settings in the "Application" screen are described detailed in the following:
Displays the operation step where the user is residing in.
[F2]: Switching between wire ends.
[F3]: Back to previous operation step.
[F5]: Forth to next operation step.
[F6]-PROCESSING: Go directly to the Processing screen.
[F+]: Display additional footer line commands for this screen.
[F+][F2]: Enter a new operation step.
[F+][F3]-BEFORE: Position the operation step before.
[F+][F5]-AFTER: Position the operation step after.
[F+][F6]: Delete the operation step.
▄
▄
92|230
Layer: The layer where the operation is to be performed. Layer 1 cannot be selected in stripping
mode, all existing layers would be stripped this way, thus it would be a cut not a strip. Only a valid
layer according to the Raw Material setting can be selected here.
Mode: (Strip/comb/slit/separate/shorten) Modes refer to different types of wire treatment that
can be done by the machine. Meaning of the modes:
• Strip: Cutting the insulation over the whole
circumference, and then pulling-off the separated part from the rest of the wire.
• Comb: Combing several twisted conductors
with a special combing device.
•
Slitting: Cutting the insulation lengthwise to
the wire axis. Requires a special slitting blade.
•
Separate: Separating the insulation lengthwise to the wire axis on flat cables, between
the individual conductors. As opposed to slitting, here the cut is not made on the insulation of a conductor, but is centered exactly
between two adjacent conductors.
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
10. Library mode
•
▄
▄
Shorten: This mode is used to shorten particular wires.
Step: (On/off). The operation is done in one sequence. If Step is activated, the total treatment
length of the linked elements is determined by the length of the rearmost of these linked elements. The cells "Length" and "Recut" are disabled, except with the last element concerned.
Steps not activated: With a full strip the wire is produced as follows:
1
2
3
Fig. 19: Step stripping (step = off)
▄
Steps activated: Several operation steps are combined to one. All incisions and stripping are performed with the same pair of blades.
1
2
3
Fig. 20: Step stripping (Step = on)
▄
▄
▄
Position: Start position for the element. Is between 0 and the total wire length.
Length: States the length of the treatment for this operation.
Direction: (from left / from right) This defines the direction in which the e. g. slitting shall be performed.
Slitting direction
Incision right
Slit
Incision left (2)
Slitting wedge
Fig. 21: Slitting direction
▄
▄
▄
Right guide: (Automatic/always in/always out). Defines the behavior of the right guide. The
standard behavior "Automatic" can be prioritized.
Right full strip: Processing/blades only/blades and belts. Defines a full strip on the right wire end.
The standard behavior "Automatic" can be prioritized.
Local Processing element: (On/off). Activating "Local Processing - elements".
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
93|230
10. Library mode
▄
10.4
Branches: In the entry field "Branch" the entered branches are shown. A block of several branch
ranges can be entered. Two sets are separated by a semi colon (e. g. 5;6;7) One set can either be
built from one branch or a continuous range of branches (e. g. beginning branch connected
through a hyphen with an end branch (e. g. 5-10).
„PROCESSING - ELEMENTS" SCREEN
All settings for the processing of a layer are made here. This can be incision diameter, possible operating modes etc.
The individual definitions per layer and branch, also per operating mode are represented detailed in
an element screen.
With the OmniStrip 9450 layer sectioning always is defined from inside to outside:
Single wire
Multi-conductor cable
1
1
2
2
3
Fig. 22: Layer sectioning
In the "Processing - Elements" screen, new elements can be added, deleted and settings within an e
element can be altered:
Displays the element where the user is residing in.
[F3]: Back to previous element.
[F5]: Forth to next element.
[F+][F2]: Add a new element.
[F+][F5]-SAVE AS: Altered processing settings can be saved
here to the Processing library under a new name.
[F+][F6]: Delete an element page.
The selected name will be taken over into the actual wire as
actual reference.
▄
▄
Layer/Mode: (Strip/comb/slit/separate/shorten) Statement of the layer; 1 stands for the innermost layer, usually the conductor of a wire. If no branches have been defined, the element applies
for the whole layer. The type of the operation mode for the layer is based on the nature (Raw
Material) of the wire.
Branches: See chapter "9.3 „Application - wire end“ screen (Page 73)".
Additional settings in this screen are described detailed in chapter "10.4 „Processing - elements" screen
(Page 94)".
94|230
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
10. Library mode
10.5
RAW MATERIAL LIBRARY
10.5.1 Overview
The initial products - that is to say wires, introduced to the
OmniStrip 9450 - are saved in the Raw Material library as
records. These records describe how a wire is made up (e.g. a
Power cord or a Flat cable). This includes the wire type (e.g.
flat cable or twisted pair cables).
This describes the Raw Material composition divided in layers.
This way the OmniStrip 9450 knows what it is processing. For
example it can check via the outer diameter if the correct wire
is loaded, or it knows how many layers can be stripped (thus
if it is a stranded wire, only layer 2 or a multi-conductor cable,
where the layers 2 or 3 can be stripped).
If a record in the library is changed, all wires linked to it are changed instantaneously without any
extra effort.
Alternatively there is the ability to manage Raw Material data independently from wires and Wire Lists
analog to the "Raw Material library" screen.
10.5.2 "Raw Material library" Screen
In this screen wires- and Wire Lists can be created from
scratch, loaded, saved, renamed and managed.
Selection screen for file operations "Raw Material list"
The list contains the Raw Material items. It is arranged similar for all file operations.
Meaning of keys and symbols:
1 Write protection
2 With [F2] selected entry
3 Entry field: Entry of the file name with
"New"/"Copy"/"Rename".
3
2
1
[F2]: Mark highlighted Raw Material (only
shown in "Manage" screen).
[F3]: Protect Raw Material.
[F4]: Select/deselect a Raw Material (depending
on the item the user has highlighted).
[F5]: Set font size to large/small.
[F6]: Delete selected Raw Material.
[F7]: Convert the wire data to the actual file for-
mat (only shown in "Manage" screen).
[F+]: Additional footer line commands (only shown in "Manage" screen).
The files in the Raw Material list can be protected against overwriting. A protected Raw Material is
marked with a locker symbol in the left column.
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
95|230
10. Library mode
[F+][F3]: Export of selected Raw Material data to the USB
memory stick.
[F+][F5]: Import of selected Raw Material data from the USB
memory stick.
File operations
For general information, see chapter "8.2.5 Wire and Wire List files (Page 63)".
▄
▄
▄
▄
▄
▄
▄
96|230
New: Creates a new Raw Material.
Load: An existing Raw Material is processed. The „Raw Materials: Load“ screen is shown.
Copy: An existing Raw Material is saved under a new name. First the „Raw Material: Copy from" is
shown. The user can select the desired item to be copied with the navigation keys. By pressing
[F1-OK] the screen "Raw Material: copy to" is shown. Enter the new name in the entry field below
and press [F1-OK].
Rename: Renames a Raw Material. First the „Raw Material: rename from" is shown. The user can
select the desired item to be renamed with the navigation keys.
Manage: To manage Raw Material records. While renaming and deleting any library records, all
wires on the machine are checked, to make sure that the entries to be deleted, are not being used
by another wire.
Caution: This operation may take some time!
A warning message appears where the user can skip the check procedure with [F3] and where
the entry will be deleted immediately. After pressing [F1]-OK another warning message is shown
to indicate "If library records are linked already". Here the following actions can be carried out:
[F1] Only the unused marked items are deleted. [F3]: All marked items are deleted. [F7]: Nothing
will be deleted (back to the list).
With [F7] the with [F2] selected Raw Material files can be converted to the actual file format. This
may be necessary in case the processing of the software is slowed down or if a software upgrade
has previously be performed on the OmniStrip 9450.
Files not write protected will not be converted. The write protection must be turned off first.
Notice: Caution, data loss! If the data are converted, they cannot be used anymore on an
OmniStrip 9450 with an older software revision loaded.
We recommend, data not to be converted (e. g. for archiving reasons) to write protect before.
Data export: With [F+][F3] the with [F2] selected Raw Material data can be exported to an USB
memory stick.
Data import: With [F+][F3] previously exported Raw Material data can be imported from an USB
memory stick.
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
10. Library mode
10.6
PROCESSING LIBRARY
10.6.1 Overview
The way in which the OmniStrip 9450 processes a certain type
of wire is defined in the Processing library as file record.
These records describe how the machine processes a wire
(e. g. a Power cord or a Flat cable). This is determined by data
such as speeds, depths of cut, way back, air jet, utilized
blades etc.
If a record in the library is changed, all wires linked to it are
changed instantaneously without any extra effort.
Alternatively there is the ability to manage Processing
records independently from wires and Wire Lists analog to
the "Processing library" screen.
10.6.2 „Processing library“ screen
In this screen Processing records are created from scratch,
loaded, saved, renamed and managed.
Selection screen for file operations "Processing list"
The list contains the Processing items. It is arranged similar for all file operations.
Meaning of keys and symbols:
1 Write protection
2 With [F2] selected entry
3 Entry field: Entry of the file name with
"New"/"Copy"/"Rename".
3
2
1
[F2]: Mark highlighted Processing entry (only
shown in "Manage" screen).
[F3]: Protect a Processing entry.
[F4]: Select / deselect all Processing entries
(depending on the item the user has highlighted).
[F5]: Set font size to large/small.
[F6]: Delete selected Processing entries.
[F7]: Convert the Processing data to the actual file format (only shown in "Manage" screen).
[F+]: Additional footer line commands (only shown in "Manage" screen).
The files in the Processing list can be protected against overwriting. A protected Raw Material is
marked with a locker symbol in the left column.
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
97|230
10. Library mode
[F+][F3]: Export of selected Processing data to the USB memory stick.
[F+][F5]: Import of selected Processing data from the USB
memory stick.
File operations
For general information, see general part, "8.2.5 Wire and Wire List files (Page 63)".
▄
▄
▄
▄
▄
▄
▄
98|230
New: Creates a new Processing. The screen "Processing: New" is shown where in the lower entry
field a new name can be typed in.
Load: An existing Processing is altered. The screen "Processing: Load" is shown.
Copy: An existing Processing is saved under a new name. First the screen „Processing: Copy from"
is shown. The user can select the desired item to be copied with the navigation keys. By pressing
[F1-OK] the screen "Processing: copy to" is shown. Enter the new name in the entry field below
and press [F1-OK].
Rename: Renames a Processing. First the screen „Processing: rename from" is shown. The user
can select the desired item to be renamed with the navigation keys. By pressing [F1-OK] the
screen "Processing: rename to" is shown. Enter the new name in the entry field below and press
[F1-OK].
Manage: To manage Processing records. One or several items can be selected, locked or deleted
here. After the screen "Processing: "Manage" is displayed, the selected entries can be marked with
[F2] and the desired operation be carried out.
While renaming and deleting any library records, all wires on the machine are checked, to make
sure that the entries to be deleted, are not being used by another wire.
Caution: This operation may take some time! A warning message appears where the user can
skip the check procedure with [F3] and where the entry will be deleted immediately. After pressing [F1]-OK another warning message is shown to indicate "If library records are linked already".
Here the following actions can be carried out:
[F1] Only the unused marked items are deleted. [F3]: All marked items are deleted anyway. [F7]:
Nothing will be deleted (back to the list).
With [F7] the with [F2] selected Processing files can be converted to the actual file format. This
may be necessary in case the processing of the software is slowed down or if a software upgrade
has previously be performed on the OmniStrip 9450.
Files not write protected will not be converted. The write protection must be turned off first.
Caution, data loss! If the data are converted, they cannot be used anymore on an OmniStrip 9450
with an older software revision loaded.
We recommend, data not to be converted (e. g. for archiving reasons) to write protect before.
Data export: With [F+][F3] the with [F2] selected Processing data can be exported to an USB
memory stick.
Data import: With [F+][F3] previously exported Processing data can be imported from an USB
memory stick.
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
11. Wire List mode
WIRE LIST MODE
A Wire List is a list of individual wires. Different wires can be produced sequentially. The Wire List can
be saved and recalled as one set.
11.1
OVERVIEW „WIRE LIST MODE“
In the following overview graphic we only show the additional screens to the Wire List mode. See also
"9.1 Graphic overview "Simple mode" (Page 69)".
Main menu
Wire List
Wire
Adding a new wire
Properties
Wire List
Comment
Stop conditions
Stop conditions
11.2
SETTING "WIRE LIST" MODE
11.2.1 Switching to "Wire List" mode
1»
2»
3»
[F1]-OK (Change to "Wire and Wire List files" screen. If in the main menu, press [1]-Wire).
[4]-New (confirm warning message „discard actual settings“ with [F1]-OK). An additional message appears: "Asking to create a Single wire or a Wire List?" appears.
Caution, data loss! By executing this command, any previous settings in the wire screens are
irrevocably lost.
Select [F5]-WIRE LIST.
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
99|230
11. Wire List mode
Screen "Single wire"
Screen "Wire List"
11.2.2 Back to single wire mode
1»
2»
3»
11.3
[F1]-OK (Change to "Wire and Wire List files" screen. If in the main menu, press [1]-Wire).
[4]-New (confirm warning message „discard actual settings“ with [F1]-OK). The message: "Asking
to create a Single wire or a Wire List?" appears.
Select [F3]-SINGLE WIRE.
LIST VIEWS
The Wire List can be shown in different ways. This gives the ability to process the list according to
different criteria. For a better overview, a more simple view can be selected as well.
The view can be changed with [F+][F6]. There are five different views:
100|230
View 1:
View 2:
View 3:
View 4:
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
11. Wire List mode
View 5:
▄
▄
▄
▄
▄
11.4
View 1: For the easy overview, only the wire name and if the wire is selected, is shown.
View 2: This list shows also the production settings from the "Wire" screen and the production
settings can be altered directly in this list.
View 3: List is shown, sorted according to the Raw Material.
View 4: List is shown, sorted according to the Processing.
View 5: In this list view, additionally to the wire name, also the Raw Material and the Processing is
shown.
LAYOUT OF WIRE LIST
[F1]-OK: Leave the Wire List and go to the "Files" screen
where the Wire List files can be managed.
[F2]: Add a new wire to the list.
[F3]: Reset production counter for the selected list items.
[F4]-EDIT: The user is guided directly to the "Wire" screen
where all the settings of the selected wire can be performed
as in "Single wire" or "Library" mode.
[F5]-PROPERTIES: Defines the behavior during production
(stop conditions and shown text).
[F6]: Delete selected list item.
[F+]: Display additional footer line commands for this screen.
[F+][F2]: Select list entry
[F+][F3]-BEFORE: Move list entry one position up.
[+][F4]-PROPERTIES: Select / deselect all List entries
(depending on the item the user has highlighted).
[F+][F5]-AFTER: Move list entry one position down.
[F+][F6]-SORT: Opens another screen, where the wires can
be sorted by certain criteria.
[F+]: Display additional footer line commands for this screen.
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
101|230
11. Wire List mode
[F+][F+][F2]: Fill the actual list with existing wires and Wire
Lists.
[F+][F+][F3]: Save a single wire from the actual Wire List as
single wire.
[F+][F+][F6]-VIEW: Change the view.
[F+]: Display additional footer line commands for this screen.
11.4.1 Produce
The wires can be produced with [RUN] or [SINGLE] directly from this list in the order from top to bottom. Only the wires marked with the O. K. symbol will be produced.
11.4.2 Fill Wire List
With [F+][F+][F2] a new Wire List can be produced, which is a
combination of already programmed single wires and/or
Wire Lists. This way a whole daily production can be programmed and automatized. Independent copies are produced. The production state in the original list persists. In the
new list it can either be taken over to or reset to zero.
11.4.3 Save Single Wire
With [F+][F+][F3] a single wire from an already programmed
Wire List can be saved as a single wire. If the file already
exists, a warning message is shown.
11.4.4 Sort Wire List
With [F+] open another screen, where the wires can be sorted by certain criteria.
[F2]-WIRE NAME: Sort list by wire name.
[F4]-RAW MATERIAL: Sort list by Raw Material data.
[F6]-PROCESSING: Sort list by Processing data.
102|230
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
11. Wire List mode
[F2]-ASCENDING: Sort list ascending.
[F3]-DESCENDING: Sort list descending.
11.5
„WIRE LIST PROPERTIES“ SCREEN
In this screen the behavior during the production e. g. quantity of passes, the order and the shown
message before changing a Raw Material can be defined.
[F2]-STOP CONDITION: Define stop conditions.
[F3]-HB COMMENT: Enter comments to the stop conditions.
▄
▄
▄
▄
▄
▄
▄
11.6
List passes: Defines how often the Wire List is to be produced in the production run. We recommend e. g., to program a Wire List which contains all the wires required for a harness. The "List
passes" field is then set according to the number of complete harnesses to be produced.
Order: (List first/wire first). "Wire first" and "List first" determine the way in which the Wire List is
to be produced. This difference is only of significance when the value for List passes is greater
than 1.
Change Raw Material: (Nothing/Message). Displays a message if the next wire from the list
expects a different Raw Material.
Comment: (On/off). Shows the comment entered under "10.5.2 "Raw Material library" Screen
(Page 95)".
Change Processing: (Nothing/Message). Displays a message if the next wire from the list expects
a different Processing.
Comment: (On/off). Shows the comment entered under "9.6 „Processing - cut“ Screen (Page 80)".
Configure HotStamp: (Nothing / Message). Displays a message if the next wire from the list
expects a different Raw Material.
„STOP CONDITIONS“ SCREEN
A stop condition describes an event during the Wire List production, which stops the production
along with a subsequent action. The kind of action is defined in the Wire List properties. There are
four possible actions:
▄
▄
Do nothing; do not interrupt the production at all
Interrupt the production, display a message.
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
103|230
11. Wire List mode
In the „Stop conditions" screen the actions can be assigned
to the corresponding production step:
▄
▄
▄
▄
▄
11.7
Wire: (Nothing/Message). Set a stop condition after the
wire has been produced. The event occurs after each produced wire. Since it is normally not recommended to
interrupt the production after each wire, the default setting is Nothing.
Batch: (Nothing/Message). Set a stop condition after a
batch has been produced. The event "Batch" occurs after
each completed batch. This event is often used to control
a device e. g. a WireStacker 3150 and to collect a batch of wires. The default setting is "Message".
Total: (Nothing / Message). Set a stop condition after the total has been reached. This event
occurs when all pieces of a wire (as set in the Total field) are produced. The default setting is "Message".
List: (Nothing/Message). Set a stop condition after the list has been produced. If the complete list
is produced, this event occurs. The default setting is "Message".
Production: (Nothing/Message). Set a stop condition after the whole production has been
accomplished. Occurs after the Wire List has been produced by the number of times set under
"List passes". The default setting is "Message".
„STOP CONDITIONS COMMENT“ SCREEN
If any of these settings are activated, the message entered in the text edit field appears according to
the behavior defined under the production step.
Comment List: (On/off). If the setting "Message" was selected with "List", the "List" comment is shown additionally after
the message. As default, this setting is not activated.
▄
Entering a comment in the field below.
Comment production: (On/off). If the setting "Message" was
selected with "Production", the "Production" comment is
shown additionally after the message. As default, this setting
is not activated.
▄
Entering a comment in the field below.
Activate wire comments: (On/off). Here the wire comments can be switched on or off globally.
11.8
PRODUCTION SEQUENCE
Wire Lists can be produced in two ways.
11.8.1 List first
The entire list is produced once, then this procedure is repeated by the quantity of list passes. In this
way a list can be produced which corresponds to a set of wires for one harness.
A Wire List e. g with 5 different wires was programmed and we wish to process this list 3 times.
Besides the setting in the "Wire List properties" screen „Order“ must be set to "List first".
104|230
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
11. Wire List mode
1
2
3
4
5
Fig. 23: List first
11.8.2 Wire first
The OmniStrip 9450 produces each wire completely (list passes x total wires), before proceeding to
the next wire. This mode is especially recommended when different Raw Materials are used. Less
waste is produced.
If "Order" is set to "Wire first", the list is produced as follows:
3x1
3x2
3x3
3x4
3x5
Fig. 24: Wire first
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
105|230
11. Wire List mode
106|230
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
12. Enhanced production
ENHANCED PRODUCTION
To get familiar easily with the operating of the machine, the following chapter contains additional
descriptions of commands necessary for the daily production of wires. Here it is also described how to
proceed if status- or error messages occur on the screen. See also chapter "6 Installation / first commissioning (Page 43)".
In the chapter "16 Programming hints / examples (Page 155)" additional simple examples for the programming are listed. For inexpertly users we recommend to work through these examples before
starting the main production.
The instructions in this chapter must be carried out by the operator personnel!
12.1
NORMAL OPERATION
12.1.1 Machine setup / blade change
See installation/first commissioning, chapter "6.5 Setup (Page 44)".
12.1.2 Programming a wire
See chapter "6.6 Producing a test wire (Page 49)" and "16 Programming hints / examples (Page 155)".
12.1.3 Loading wire on the machine
1»
2»
3»
4»
Connect the machine to the mains and
switch it on.
Disengage the emergency stop button.
Ä After switching on, the wire end switch
(1) is raised automatically so that the wire
can be feed in easily.
Slide in the wire from the left side and push
it forward to the left guide.
1
2
Close the safety cover (the mechanical
drives on the OmniStrip 9450 start activating, audible noise).
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
107|230
12. Enhanced production
5»
Press [LOAD/UNLOAD].
Ä The transport units move to the "Open"
position and clamp the wire according to
the programming. Finally the wire is feed
forwards, cut and the separated right
piece is ejected.
Alternatively the wire can also be loaded
with [OPEN/CLOSE] and [CUT]. For this
the wire must be pushed beyond the
right guide.
12.1.4 Start the production
After loading the wire, the production can be started. Production can be carried out in two different
ways:
With the key [RUN]
The total amount entered, is produced at once. ("Total" and
"Batch"). During production the screen "Production" is shown.
Mode: Key with which the production has been started.
Wire name: Saved single wire or wires from the Wire List.
Total: Total amount of wires to be produced.
Produced: Already produced wires.
Batch: Total amount of batches to be produced.
Batch Left: Batches left over for production.
Pieces/hour: Amount of wires produced during one hour.
This value is an aid to optimize the production speed.
Last wire [ms]: Time elapsed for the production of the previous wire. This value is an aid to optimize
the production speed.
At the end of a batch production, the user is called upon to
continue with the next batch. In the "Wire List" mode the
message can be switched off if desired.
As soon as the batches have been finished, the production is
confirmed with [F1]-OK. In the "Wire List" mode the message
can be switched off if desired.
108|230
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
12. Enhanced production
With the key [SINGLE]
Only a single wire is produced. This function is implemented normally to test the wire settings. Here
only the wire name is shown in the production screen. After the end of the production the machine
automatically returns to the "Wire" screen. The settings can now be inspected and altered if needed.
12.1.5 Production in step by step mode
As well as with „Single“ and „Run“ the user may observe if all steps perform properly during production.
The step by step mode can be invoked with [STOP]. The following message is displayed then:
Step by step mode:
Each movement step is accomplished with every keystroke.
But synchronous movements are still performing simultaneously.
The step by step mode is switched on with [F1]-YES. Press
[SINGLE] or [RUN], the following screen is shown.
Navigation while in step by step mode:
[F1]: Next single step.
[F3]: Single steps are processed automatically accordant to a
pre-defined waiting time.
[F5]: Leave the mode, continue the production normally.
[F7]: Cancel.
Press [F3] (Wire will be produced in the automated step by step mode). During the production it is
possible to change the pause between the single steps, to interrupt or to leave the step by step mode
or to continue the production in the normal manner.
Navigation during the production:
[F2]: Longer pause.
[F3]: Interrupt.
[F4]: Shorter pause.
[F5]: Leave step by step mode. Continue production without
pause.
The step by step mode can be invoked with [STOP] even during production when a message is shown.
12.1.6 Unloading a wire
1»
2»
3»
Press [LOAD/UNLOAD], alternatively also [OPEN/CLOSE] can be used.
The cutter head and the transport belts open fully.
Pull out the wire on the left of the machine.
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
109|230
12. Enhanced production
12.1.7 Reloading a wire
If the wire has been used up during production, the wire end
switch drops down and the message "No wire" is shown on
the touch screen.
To load a new wire after this, proceed as follows:
[F2]-OK: Finish partially produced wire (Caution: Check the
wire for proper production).
Method A
1»
2»
3»
4»
Press [FEED] until the last produced wire is ejected (always check the wire for proper production).
Press [OPEN].
The wire end switch is lifted. Slide in new wire passing the wire end switch and the turret guide
up to the transport belts.
Press [CLOSE] > [FEED] and then [CUT].
Method B
1»
2»
3»
4»
12.2
Press [FEED] until the last produced wire is ejected (always check the wire for proper production).
Press [LOAD/UNLOAD] (wire is unloading).
Slide in new wire passing the wire end switch and the turret guide up to the transport belts.
Again press [LOAD/UNLOAD] (the transport belts open and close again until the wire is sensed.
The wire is feed forwards and cut.
MESSAGES
12.2.1 Messages during start-up
Maintenance reminder on machine start
In the OmniStrip 9450 software there is a built in maintenance reminder function, which may be monitored during start up of the machine. If the reminder is switched on and the interval has expired, a
message is shown up, which advises the maintenance personnel to perform a corrective action.
There is a factory „Default reminder“ where a general maintenance according to "17.4 Maintenance
schedule (Page 176)" has to be performed if shown up. Additionally the maintenance personnel may
program as many user specific reminders as necessary, which may be switched on or off as desired,
see „Configuration“, chapter "13.4.10 Maintenance reminder (Page 121)".
NOTICE
Caution, maloperation!
The reminder messages should not be ignored, especially the factory „Default reminder“. Disregarding may lead to malfunction or damage to the machine.
110|230
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
12. Enhanced production
The message can be confirmed with [F1]-OK which enables
the user to accomplish the current production in the normal
way. But it is save to contact the maintenance personnel in
such a case, so that they can perform the corresponding
maintenance.
If the user switches of and on the machine only, the message
is shown again. However in continuous operation the message is only shown once per 24 Hours.
12.2.2 Messages during the production
Maintenance reminder during production
The built in maintenance reminder function in the OmniStrip 9450 which, if enabled, even shows up
while starting and completing the production of a wire.
No zero cut done
If a wire is loaded with [CLOSE] and the production is started
without performing a [CUT] operation, a message is shown
on the "Production" screen. When this message shows up it is
important to inspect the first wire for proper length.
Reset production
Another warning message appears if the same production is
started a second time:
[F1]-OK: Resets the production counter.
To avoid this, reset the production counter in the
„Wire“ screen with [F3] first.
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
111|230
12. Enhanced production
112|230
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
13. Configuration settings
CONFIGURATION SETTINGS
In the "Configuration" you define the basic settings which serve as a basis for the functioning of the
machine. These settings are valid for all wire/cable programs and affect the entire programming on
the machine. The settings can be prioritized in some Processing screens.
The instructions in this chapter must be carried out by qualified personnel!
13.1
GENERAL SETTINGS FOR THE OPERATION
As far as not mentioned, here the user finds additional hardware settings necessary for the production of wires. See chapter "6 Installation / first commissioning (Page 43)".
13.2
OVERVIEW CONTROL SOFTWARE
13.2.1 Available view modes
In the "Configuration", the settings can be managed in the so called "Text" or „Graphic“ mode.
Text mode
Graphic mode
The screens to the system components are
invoked through menus.
The individual system components are shown
graphically. The corresponding screens are
invoked through function keys directly.
To toggle between "Graphic mode" and "Text mode", see chapter "13.4.7 User interface (Page 120)".
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
113|230
13. Configuration settings
13.2.2 Menu structure "Text mode"
Main menu
Configuration
Interfaces
Post-processing
Machine
Pre-processing
13.2.3 Graphic view
In this screen, the desired part of the machine or the peripheral device to be set, can be selected
directly. The footer line in the screen changes accordingly. The settings in the particular screens are
described detailed in the "Text mode".
1
2
3
4
5
6
13
7
12
11
9
10
1
PreFeeder:
▄
2
114|230
[F2]-PREFEEDER
Inkjet:
▄
8
[F2]-INKJET PRINTER
Serial 2:
▄
9
8
[F2]-INKJET
PreFeeder (connector HS/PF and Prefeed):
▄
[F2]-PREFEEDER
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
13. Configuration settings
3
User interface and clock:
▄
▄
▄
▄
▄
4
▄
▄
▄
5
7
[F2]-PREFEEDER
Serial 3 (Inkjet):
▄
▄
11
12
[F2]-INKJET
[F2]-PEDAL
Ethernet:
▄
13
[F2]-PREFEEDER
[F4]-HOTSTAMP
Pedal:
▄
[F2]-PREFEEDER
Post-processing:
▄
▄
[F2]-BLADES
[F3]-PRODUCTION
[F5]-UTILITIES
[F6]-TRANSPORT
Post-processing:
▄
6
[F2]-USER INTERFACE
[F3]-USER LEVEL S
[F4]: Save configuration data as text file
to an USB memory stick
[F5]-REMINDER
[F6]-CLOCK
Machine settings:
▄
10 Prefeeder (connector HS/PF and Prefeed):
[F2]-ETHERNET
HotStamp:
▄
[F2]-HOTSTAMP
[F7] Save configuration data as screen shot
to an USB memory stick
13.2.4 Main menu
Menu level: 4
[F3]: Save the configuration data as screen shots to an USB
memory stick.
[F5]: Save the configuration data as a text file to an USB
memory stick.
13.3
PRE-PROCESSING
Here the general settings for prefeeders and marking devices are made.
Menu level: 4-1
13.3.1 PreFeeder
Here prefeeders (Schleuniger „PreFeeder“) can be defined.
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
115|230
13. Configuration settings
Menu level: 4-1-1
Available: (Yes/no). Can be deactivated to inhibit the monitoring of the electrical connection to the prefeeder. HotStamp cannot be used during production if not switched on
(activated).
Caution! If a prefeeder is connected but not switched on in
the "Configuration", an error message occurs during production.
13.3.2 HotStamp
Here a marking device („HotStamp“ or e. g. a Thermal transfer printer) can be defined.
Menu level: 4-1-2
Available: (Yes/no). Can be deactivated to inhibit the checking. „HotStamp” cannot be used during production if the
device is not switched on (activated).
Distance: This defines the distance from the HotStamp to the
blade axis of the machine.
[F3]-CALIBRATION: The calibration of the distance is menu
guided.
Pulse duration [ms]: During the dwell time the output to the
HotStamp is activated, the printing is started respectively it
takes as long as the pulse lasts.
Feedback: (Yes/no). No -> The signal is transferred according to the dwell time, after the waiting time
the machine continues with the production.
Yes -> The signal is transferred according to the dwell time, after the device responds, the machine
continues with the production, as long as no "Time-out" occurs.
Delay time after signal [ms]: Time the machine is waiting after the pulse duration, before the production continuous (only if „Feedback” from the HotStamp is deactivated).
Menu level: 4-1-2
Timeout duration [ms]: Sets the time, how long the
OmniStrip 9450 is waiting for a response from the HotStamp,
until an error message occurs if „Feedback” is switched to
„Yes”.
13.3.3 Inkjet printer device
This defines a printer device (Inkjet printer).
The list of the Inkjet printers depends on the installed printer library. Two printers may be installed at
the total.
116|230
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
13. Configuration settings
Menu level: 4-1-3
Inkjet printer X: (None/Imaje/MetronicAlphaJet/Wiedenbach...). In addition the interface is shown where the printer is
hooked up to.
Time format: Country specific time format to be shown. The
list contains the standard combinations for the 24- and the
12-hour system and for the ISO and U.S. date format including the display of the calendar week.
Date format: Set the date format to the country specific circumstances, see above.
Distance: This defines the distance from the print head to the blade axis of the OmniStrip 9450.
[F3]-CALIBRATION: The calibration of the distance is menu guided.
13.4
MACHINE
Here the general settings concerning the OmniStrip 9450 are made. Specific settings are password
protected and can only be altered by specially instructed personnel.
Menu level: 4-2
[F3]-CLOCK Change of system time and date.
If the backup battery on the main PCB is low or missing, the
clock always is reset!
13.4.1 Clock
Menu level: 4-2-[F3]
In the upper area the current time and date is shown, in the
area below the values can be set.
[F2]-SET: The clock will be initialized with the entered settings.
13.4.2 Blade
Menu level: 4-2-1
Blade width: (width + position). First the width of the blades
to be used is defined. Normally the standard width 16 mm (2
blade positions) or 10.5 mm (3 blade positions) is used. Alternatively the quantity of blades can be selected from 1 to 10.
The widths are freely definable then.
Type: (Blade type). This defines the type of blades and the
calibrated values of the individual blades for each position (if
selectable). A choice must be made in each selectable position. If no blade is mounted, select „None". Possible blade types:
▄
V-blades: For standard wires with small diameters, cut and strip.
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
117|230
13. Configuration settings
▄
▄
▄
▄
Radius-blades: Firm, thin and extremely elastic and thick insulations.
Die blade: Special blade, adapted to the conductor and the outer shape of a wire.
Custom blades: Special designs like slitting blades, flat blades etc.
None: If no blades are mounted.
Zero Z: The „Home position“ is the starting point of the cutter head while the machine is initializing.
„Zero Z“ is the largest possible opening of the blade holders.
Zero Y: The „Home position“ is the starting point of the cutter head while the machine is initializing.
With „Zero Y“ the cutter head is fully extended.
[F3]-CALIBRATION: See chapter "17.10 Maintenance / repair work (Page 184)"
[F5]-BLADE CHANGE: The user reconfirms the mechanical blade change with [F1].
See also chapter "5.7.7 Cutter head with blades (Page 38)".
13.4.3 Transport units
Menu level: 4-2-3
Mechanical settings for the transport units.
In this screen, only the „Feed resolution” can be changed. For
a detailed description, see chapter "17 Maintenance / maintenance schedule (Page 175)".
In the header, the version of the transport units used in the
machine are displayed.
13.4.4 Interfaces
Menu level: 4-2-4
Here only the Ethernet interface and the pedal function settings can be changed.
The menu levels 1 - 3 are only accessible for Schleuniger and
their distributors via the service password.
ETHERNET
Menu level: 4-2-4-4
Connection of the OmniStrip 9450 to a TCP/IP network. (e. g.
connection machine - PC, to operate together with the wire
processing software Cayman).
To establish a connection between the PC and the machine,
each device must be capable to send data to the other. To
make sure that this data arrive correctly on the other station
it must be named (addressed) explicitly. This on ETHERNET
networks is done with an IP address.
IP-address: Available address in the local network (check with your IT administrator).
Subnet mask: Check with your IT administrator for more information.
Standard gateway: Check with your IT administrator for more information.
118|230
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
13. Configuration settings
Pedal
Menu level: 4-2-4-5
Available: (Yes/no). „No“ > deactivates all pedal functions.
Start mode: Pressing the pedal starts the production in the
desired mode.
▄
▄
▄
▄
None: Function deactivated.
Run: All wires.
Run1: only one wire.
Single: only one wire, without changing the production
state.
Interrupt: (Yes/no). Yes > pressing the pedal interrupts the production.
13.4.5 Utilities
Menu level: 4-2-5
Wire end switch: (Yes/no). „No“ > deactivates the checking
for an available wire.
Air jet unit: (Yes/no). Activates or deactivates the air jet unit.
13.4.6 Production
Menu level: 4-2-6
Production prepare: (On / Off). "On" > the remaining wire is
already pre processed during the production e. g. with Inkjet
printer or HotStamp. This way more wires can be produced
with e. g. [SINGLE] without constituting any slug. "Off" > Pre
Processing on the successive wire is not performed.
Short mode from: If the slug resting on the wire is smaller or
the same as this value, the wire is produced in "Short mode"
(if selected in the Processing screen).
Hints: (On/off). Switches the hints during production on or off. Also the „Short mode” message is
switched on or off therewith.
Mode for key single: (Run1/Single)
▄
▄
Run1: >only one wire will be produced.
Single: >only one wire, without resetting the production counter.
Switch on the option "Production prepare" if Pre Processing operations are used to avoid expensive
wire clipping.
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
119|230
13. Configuration settings
13.4.7 User interface
Menu level: 4-2-7 (part 1)
Language: (German/English/....). The menu language used in
display. The selection depends on the installed language
library.
Length unit: (mm/inch). Measuring unit to be appearing in
the wire screens.
Temperature unit: (°C/°F)
Diag/conf menu: (Text/graphic). Selecting the mode for displaying the "Diagnose" and "Configuration" screens, see also
chapter "13.2.3 Graphic view (Page 114)".
Tip: (On/off). Displays tooltips on the lower screen section.
Display contrast [%]: Change the display contrast while poorly light conditions exist.
Display background: (Bright/dark). Dark > screen fonts are shown inverted.
Keyboard beep: (On/off). On > an audible sound appears with each key press.
Machine name: Is saved together with the log files and lists created during production.
USB-keyboard: The type of the external keyboard used is defined here. The selection depends on the
installed language library.
Panel: (German/English/....). Panel language being used. Defines the layout of the numeric keys on
the panel.
Menu level: 4-2-7 (part 2)
Mouse support: (On/off/automatic). Switch on mouse support. With „Auto” the system searches for a connected
mouse. The mouse pointer only appears if the mouse is connected.
Mouse speed: (1....200). The default value is 100.
Mouse acceleration: (Slow/normal/fast).
Mouse exchange keys: Comment on/off
Cayman support: (On/off). The communication to the wire
processing software Caymancan here be activated. When the
OmniStrip 9450 and the computer where Cayman is installed, are connected via a network cable, the
machine automatically establishes a connection to Cayman and the programming and production of
wires may be fully accomplished with Cayman. For a detailed description of the connection settings,
see the „Cayman - Reference Manual”.
Cayman Ethernet Port: Ports (connections) are address components used in network protocols to
assign data segments to its appropriate services (protocols). On the OmniStrip 9450 and in the Cayman software, the same port number must be set. For a detailed description, see the „Cayman - Reference Manual”.
Mode of new wire: (Simple mode/library mode/Last wire). Default setting while creating a new wire.
Show in wire list mode: (Running cycle/batch left).
Time format: (Time, Date) Country specific time format settings for the whole machine. The list contains the standard combinations for the 24- and the 12-hour system and for the ISO and U.S. date format including the display of the calendar week. For detailed information of the format structure see
chapter "20.2 Time / date formats (Page 194)".
Date format: (Date, Time) Country specific date format settings for the whole machine.
13.4.8 Toggle user interface between graphic / text mode
Switch user interface to "Graphic" mode
120|230
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
13. Configuration settings
Menu level: 4-2-7
1»
2»
[4]-Configuration > [2]-Machine > [7]-User interface.
At the "Diag/config" entry > select "Graphic".
See chapter "13.2.3 Graphic view (Page 114)".
Switch user interface to "Text" mode
1»
2»
3»
Select the panel area with the navigation keys (arrow).
Select [F2]- USER INTERFACE.
At the "Diag/config" entry > select "Text".
13.4.9 User levels/password protection
Menu level: 4-2-8
User levels: (Yes/No) Here the user level management can
be switched on or off.
Current level: Displays the current user level where the user
is logged in.
Password: Entry field for the password of the current user
level. If this password is unknown, the user level management cannot be activated.
Operator without password: (Yes/no)
▄
▄
No > The machine can only be started by entering a password.
Yes > An additional entry line is shown.
Auto login for operator: (Yes/no)
▄
▄
No > The „Login“ screen is shown but no password must be entered.
Yes > The wire screen is accessed directly.
Change password
Menu level: 4-2-8-[F3]
Level: (Operator/Programmer/Maintenance) Defines the level where a password change can be made.
Old password: Entering the previously defined- or the initial
password.
New password: Enter the new password (allowed characters
are 0-9).
13.4.10 Maintenance reminder
The screens for the maintenance reminder functions are reserved for maintenance personnel only. To
make any changes here the user must be logged in to the user level „Maintenance“.
If the backup battery on the PCB is low or missing, the reminder function is not working anymore!
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
121|230
13. Configuration settings
Menu level: 4-2-9
Expired: If the maintenance reminder interval has been
expired, a symbol is shown in this column.
[F2]: Enter a new reminder.
[F3]: Reset interval counter.
[F4]-EDIT: Modify the reminder entry.
The first list item is set to factory default. Only the interval
and the comment can be changed here. This item cannot be
disabled, but the interval be reset (can be lowered only).
Maintenance reminder - edit:
Menu level: 4-2-9-[F4]
Name: To enter a corresponding name for the reminder.
Activated: (Yes/No) Activate or deactivate the reminder.
Type: (Operating time/Production time/Fan time/Timer/
Total counter)
The following will be taken into account:
▄
▄
▄
▄
▄
Operating time: The total time the machine was in operation.
Production time: The time the machine is producing.
Fan time: The time the fan was on.
Time: The total time elapsed (including the time, the machine is switched off).
Total counter: The total of wires to be produced.
Unit: (Hours / Days) In which measuring unit shall the interval be displayed.
Interval: Defines at which interval a reminder message is shown up (see also „Type“).
Remaining: Counts the remaining (see under "Type").
Comment: An additional comment for the reminder setting (e. g. a detailed description of the maintenance instruction to be performed).
[F3]: Previous reminder entry.
[F5]: Next reminder entry.
If a value has been changed in this screen, the interval counter is reset (same as [F3] in the „Maintenance reminder“ screen).
The following operating conditions on the machine trigger an expired reminder:
▄
▄
▄
13.5
While the machine starts up.
Starting the production.
Ending the production.
POST-PROCESSING
Here the general settings for the Post processing devices like WireStacker and CableCoiler are made.
122|230
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
13. Configuration settings
13.5.1 Current device
Menu level: 4-3
Selection between "Without Post processing" and all activated Post processing devices (Available = Yes).
13.5.2 Without post processing
Menu level: 4-3-1
Distance: Distance measured between the blade axis and the
ejection position.
[F2]-PROPERTIES: More settings for this screen.
Without post processing - properties
Menu level: 4-3-1-[F2]
Ejection: (Continuous/single/release).
13.5.3 WireStacker
Menu level: 4-3-2
Available: (Yes/no). The wire stacker can only be selected in
the list of active devices if „Available” = "Yes" is set.
Distance: Distance measured between the blade axis and
the ejection position on the wire stacker. Standard value
= 138 mm, directly right of the right transport unit.
[F2]-PROPERTIES: More settings for this screen.
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
123|230
13. Configuration settings
WireStacker - properties
Menu level: 4-3-2-[F2]
See chapter "13.6 Collaboration with peripheral devices
(Page 124)".
13.5.4 Cablecoiler
Menu level: 4-3-3
Available: (Yes/no). The CableCoiler can only be selected in
the list of active devices if „Available” = "Yes" is set.
Distance: Distance measured between the blade axis and the
takeover position of the CableCoiler. Standard value
= 138 mm, directly right of the right transport unit.
Connection monitoring: Continuously checks if a CableCoiler is connected.
[F2]-PROPERTIES: More settings for this screen.
CableCoiler - properties
Menu level: 4-3-3-[F2]
See chapter "13.6.2.3 Cablecoiler (Page 131)".
13.6
COLLABORATION WITH PERIPHERAL DEVICES
The machine can be combined with individual peripheral devices to a complete production line. This
chapter contains helpful information, i. e. how the individual peripheral devices are placed on the
machine, configured and activated in the software.
We distinguish between Pre Processing and Post Processing devices.
13.6.1 Pre-processing devices
PreFeeder
The machine can be operated with a pre feeder device (Schleuniger PreFeeder or a custom product).
124|230
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
13. Configuration settings
PreFeeder
Wire processing machine
Processing axis
1»
2»
3»
4»
5»
6»
Place the pre feeder left to the machine. The processing axis of the machines must be aligned.
Connect both machines with the interface cable. A connection can be established through the
"HS/PF" interface or for new devices through the „PREFEED“ interface.
Set up the Prefeeder in the OmniStrip 9450 Configuration.
Load the wire on the Prefeeder (for the detailed procedure see „PreFeeder Manual“).
Program the desired wire on the OmniStrip 9450.
Load the wire and start the production.
HotStamp
The machine can be operated with a marking device (Schleuniger HotStamp or a custom product).
Distance „Z“
HotStamp
Blade
Processing axis
Wire processing machine
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
125|230
13. Configuration settings
1»
2»
3»
4»
5»
6»
Place the HotStamp left to the machine. Processing level of both devices must be aligned in the
X- and Y-axis.
Hook up the devices. If a Schleuniger HotStamp device is used the connection cable is enclosed.
A connection can be established through the "HS/PF" interface or for new devices through the
„PREFEED“ interface.
The distance from the cutting axis (blades) of the machine to the right side of the printing
wheel edge should not exceed 1 m.
The distance should not be changed during operation. Use a robust table or the original
Schleuniger system rack.
Set up the position and the further parameters in the "Area editor".
Carry out the distance calibration on the OmniStrip 9450.
First cut
Distance „Z“
7»
8»
9»
Load the wire on the HotStamp (the detailed procedure can be found in the „HotStamp Manual“.
Program the desired wire on the OmniStrip 9450.
Load the wire and start the production.
Program the marking operation not until the wire has been cut and stripped properly. This way any
wire loss can be held on a minimum.
The OmniStrip 9450 automatically calculates the wire loss (waste piece) that takes place during the
start of the processing.
The wire corresponding to the distance between the marking device and the machine has no influence on the specified production quantity.
Inkjet printer left of machine
The machine can be operated with an Inkjet printer.
Distance „Z“
Inkjet printer device
Processing axis
Wire processing machine
126|230
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
13. Configuration settings
1»
2»
3»
4»
Position the Inkjet printer device as close as possible to the machine ("Distance Z“ as short as
possible). Processing level of both devices must be aligned in the X- and Y-axis.
Connect both devices. Connect the cable to the "Serial 3" interface on the machine and to the
Inkjet printer together with the cable of the encoding wheel.
Set up the position and the further parameters in the "Area editor".
Carry out a distance calibration.
First cut
Distance „Z“
5»
6»
7»
Load a wire on the Inkjet printer device. Consult the manual for the Inkjet printer device for a
detailed procedure description.
Program the desired wire.
Load the wire on the machine and start the production.
Program the marking operation not until the wire has been cut and stripped properly. This way any
wire loss can be held on a minimum.
The OmniStrip 9450 automatically calculates the wire loss (waste piece) that takes place during the
start of the processing. The wire corresponding to the distance between the marking device and the
OmniStrip 9450 has no influence on the specified production quantity.
13.6.2 Post-processing devices
Post processing devices are CableCoilers, WireStackers etc..
Without post processing
▄
▄
▄
▄
Ejection: (Continuous/single/release). After the transport belts have stopped on the programmed
position, the wire will be ejected accurately.
Continuous: The completed wire remains between the right hand transport belts and the next
wire is already processed. Ejection takes place automatically at the next feed. This setting does
not delay the production.
Single: The produced wire is ejected through the right hand transport belts and not until then
the next wire is being produced. Although this delays the production, the wire is ejected in a
defined manner.
Release: The finally processed wire is fed to the ejecting position. Subsequently the right transport belts open to assure a defined handing over. This way the wire is not ejected but released.
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
127|230
13. Configuration settings
Ejection speed: (From feed / user defined) With the setting "From feed" the wire is ejected with
the speed defined under "Processing - feed". Optionally a user defined combination of speed and
acceleration can be set for the ejection.
Offset: With the ejection offset the ejection position against the blades (positive values) or away
from blades (negative values) can be corrected. Negative values affect the wire to be kept in the
transport belts, and are only meaningful if "Kick off" is switched on.
Kick off: (Off/user defined) If the "Kick off" is switched off, the ejecting process has finished after
approaching the ejection position. If "Kick off" is switched on, the wire is ejected as defined after
reaching the ejection position, e. g. a controlled feed selected under "Kick off" is performed after.
▄
▄
▄
Ejection position
Kick-off
Fig. 25: Kick off
WireStacker passive/active
The machine can be operated with a WireStacker (Schleuniger WireStacker or custom product).
Installation
Processing axis
Wire processing machine
1»
2»
3»
4»
5»
WireStacker
Place the WireStacker right to the machine. The processing axes of the machines must be
aligned. Adjust the height of the WireStacker to the machine. The adapter of the WireStacker
must be positioned as close as possible to the ejection point on the machine.
Connect both devices. Hook up the connection cable to the machine, on the „POSTFEED“ interface.
Enter the distance in the Configuration.
Program the desired wire.
Load a wire on the OmniStrip 9450 and start the production.
Settings
Programming the wire stacker is performed as follows:
128|230
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
13. Configuration settings
▄
▄
Ejection speed: (From feed / user defined) With the setting "From feed" the wire is ejected with
the speed defined under "Processing - feed". Optionally a user defined combination of speed and
acceleration can be set for the ejection.
Offset: While ejecting the wire, it is moved to the position set in the screen "Configuration - wire
stacker - distance". This value defines the distance from the blades to the wire stacker. Normally
the wire stacker is positioned directly facing on the right transport belts. With the ejection offset
the ejection position against the blades (positive values) or away from blades (negative values)
can be corrected. Negative values affect the wire to be stick in the transport belts, and are only
meaningful if "Kick off" is switched on.
- Offset +
Ejection position
WireStacker
Distance to the wire stacker
(distance from the blades)
Fig. 26: Ejection with „offset“
▄
Kick off: (Off/user defined) If the "Kick off" is switched off, the ejecting process has finished after
approaching the ejection position. If "Kick off" is switched on, the wire is ejected as defined after
reaching the ejection position, e. g. a controlled feed selected under "Kick off" is performed after.
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
129|230
13. Configuration settings
Ejection position = distance of wire stacker + ejection offset
Offset
Kick-off
WireStacker
Distance to the wire stacker
(distance from the blades)
Fig. 27: Ejection with „Kick off“ is on
▄
▄
▄
130|230
Ejection time [ms]: The ejecting operation requires more or less time depending on the nature of
the wire. This time is set in ms.
Pause after ejection [ms]: As soon as a wire is ejected it takes some time until the wire stacker is
back in its home position. The OmniStrip 9450 must therefore wait before it can feed the next
wire. This time is set in ms.
Additional properties with active wire stacker:
Here we find under "Additional properties" an additional function „Batch - production stop". This
defines how machine and wire stacker shall act after finishing a batch or the total production.
The following options are available:
Option
Batch complete
Total complete
Never stops
No message
Batch tray of stacker swivels
down
Message is shown
Batch tray of stacker swivels down
Stop on each batch
Message is shown
Batch tray of stacker swivels
down
Message is shown
Batch tray of stacker swivels down
Stop on each 2nd batch
1. Batch:
No message
Batch tray of stacker swivels
down
2. Batch
Show message
Wait for F1
Message is shown
Tray stays down
According to the list settings
or always with single wires
According to the list settings
or always with single wires
Tray stays up
According to the list settings
or always with single wires
According to the list settings
or always with single wires
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
13. Configuration settings
Cablecoiler
Installation
Wire processing axis
Wire processing machine
1»
2»
3»
4»
5»
Cablecoiler
Place the CableCoiler right to the machine. The processing axes of the machines must be
aligned. Adjust the height of the CableCoiler to the machine. The adapter of the CableCoiler
must be positioned as close as possible to the ejection point on the machine.
Connect both devices. Hook up the connection cable to the machine, on the „POSTFEED“ interface.
Configure it.
Program the desired wire.
Load a wire on the OmniStrip 9450 and start the production.
For the correct transport speed to the CableCoiler, the encoder factor in the configuration setting of
the connected CableCoiler must be adapted to the OmniStrip 9450. See table in the CableCoiler
„Operator Manual“.
Settings
Programming the CableCoiler is performed as follows:
▄
Ejection offset: While ejecting the wire, it is moved to the position set in the screen "Configuration - CableCoiler - distance". This value defines the distance in-between the blades and the
CableCoiler. With the ejection offset the ejection position against the blades (positive values) or
away from blades (negative values) can be corrected.
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
131|230
13. Configuration settings
Distance to the CableCoiler (distance from the blades)
Offset
Cablecoiler
Fig. 28: Eject position on the CableCoiler
▄
Binding position [%]: Here the user defines the position where the wire has to be bind. Assuming the wire will be bind after half of it is coiled. In this case he enters 50 %. The CableCoiler then
stops on this position. The binding position can be set to any position within the wire length. If
"0 %" is selected, the function is disabled.
Programming
The post processing devices can be programmed on three different places:
In the Configuration
If a Post Processing device is used with any wires, this can be
selected in the screen "Configuration". This type of programming is adequate, if the machine is installed together with
only one peripheral device and where the layout is changed
seldom or never. Each wire is produced by using the peripheral device. Therefore the Post Processing mode in the
screen "Processing - Options" must be set to "Configuration".
In this case, the type of Post Processing device can be selected directly in the screen "Configuration" "13 Configuration
settings (Page 113)". The properties for the Post Processing device can be selected within the corresponding sub menus.
In the Processing
If a designated wire type (defined by the Processing) is used
always with the same Post Processing device, this can be
selected in the Processing. This type of programming is recommended if several peripheral devices are available in a
line. In this case, which peripheral device is used during production, can be selected in the Processing.
132|230
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
13. Configuration settings
In the „Local Processing“
If for a designated wire a defined Post Processing device is
used, it can be selected in the local Processing. This type of
Processing is recommended if a designated wire has to be
produced differently from the programmed wires in the list.
Post processing mode
This defines if the Post Processing device is controlled basically by the „Configuration“ or the „Processing“. The default value is set to "Configuration".
Selecting the Devices
The OmniStrip 9450 compares the selected devices of the Processing to the devices in the machine
configuration in the following order:
▄
▄
Selected standard device.
Activated third party device, beginning by the first.
If no conforming device is found after this, and if "Without Post Processing " is selected, work is performed without a Post-processing device. If this was not the case, an error message is displayed prior
to the production of a wire with this Processing.
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
133|230
13. Configuration settings
134|230
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
14. Diagnostics / troubleshooting
DIAGNOSTICS / TROUBLESHOOTING
Errors and others can occur if excessive pollution affects the components. If the fan filters are dirty, it
is recognized specially with height ambient temperature.
Regular inspection and maintenance reduces the risk of unexpected faults and increases the reliability and life cycle of the machine. Maintenance work must be accomplished according to the instructions and the time intervals listed. See chapter "17 Maintenance / maintenance schedule (Page 175)".
14.1
GENERAL FAULT LOCALIZATION
14.1.1 Safety instructions
General
Safety appliances must not be deactivated or removed inadvertently.
If a fault condition occurs always check first if the line power is switched on and then perform a diagnostic check.
The instructions in this chapter must be carried out by qualified personnel!
14.1.2 Behavior in case of an error
We advise the customer in case of a serious fault, to contact the local Schleuniger distributor, see
"Page 2“.
Thereby, always report the software version number. Additionally inform about the selected stripping
type and if the wire was stripped in normal- or "Short mode".
14.1.3 Fault indicators
Errors recognized by the software or the internal electronics are displayed as follows:
Error messages on the operator panel
Fig. 29: Overview of fault indicators
14.1.4 Drawings / circuit diagrams / flow charts
Drawings, circuit diagrams and flow charts may be helpful during trouble shooting. See chapter "20
Appendix (Page 193)".
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
135|230
14. Diagnostics / troubleshooting
14.1.5 Actions after solving errors
To check the correct functioning of the machine before the series production, a functional check has
to be performed.
14.1.6 Causes of faults and action required
Diagnostics
Cause of fault
The OmniStrip 9450 does
not respond
▄
▄
▄
▄
Production cannot be started
▄
▄
Feeding mechanism not
working
▄
▄
▄
Actions to be taken
Blown fuse
Not connected to the mains
Emergency stop button
engaged or main switch
turned off
Safety cover open
▄
Entering of values not completed
Peripheral devices not switched on
▄
Tension force on Wire straightener too high
Wire feeding improperly
Transport speed too high
▄
▄
▄
▄
▄
▄
▄
No feeding even if transport
belts are moving
▄
▄
▄
Wire length not correct
▄
▄
▄
Bad incision quality
▄
▄
▄
▄
Insulation is not stripped
anymore
▄
▄
▄
▄
▄
▄
▄
136|230
Contact pressure too low
Outworn or slippery transport
belts
Tension force on Wire straightener too high
▄
Wrong setting
Transport speed too high
Slippage
▄
Outworn blades
Improper fine tuning
Elastically insulation
Wrong blade type
▄
Pull-off speed too high
Contact pressure too low
Outworn or slippery transport
belts
Incision diameter set wrong
Wrong blade type
Outworn blades
Pull-off length too short
▄
▄
▄
▄
▄
▄
▄
▄
▄
▄
▄
▄
▄
▄
Exchange the fuse
Plug in power cord
Disengage emergency stop
button or switch the machine
on
Close the safety cover
Press [ENTER] or [ESC]
Switch on peripheral devices
or brake connection to
OmniStrip 9450
Reduce tension force to the
wire straightener
Check for constant and
smooth wire guiding
Reduce feed speed and velocity
Increase contact pressure
Replace transport belts
Reduce tension force to the
wire straightener
Correct setting
Alter feed speed
Increase contact pressure
Exchange blades
Correct fine tuning
Increase incision pause
Use suitable blades
Adjust pull-off speed
Increase contact pressure
Replace transport belts
Correct incision diameter value
Mount other blade type
Exchange blades
Increase pull-off length
Wire is flat or damaged
▄
Contact pressure too high
▄
Correct contact pressure
Error on Inkjet printer
▄
The Inkjet printer is not ready
or switched off
▄
Switch on device
Check power connection
▄
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
14. Diagnostics / troubleshooting
Diagnostics
Cause of fault
Error in CableCoiler
▄
The CableCoiler is not ready or
switched off
Actions to be taken
▄
▄
Switch on device
Check power connection
14.1.7 Messages
There are three types of messages which could occur during the production or programming the
OmniStrip 9450:
▄
▄
▄
General information
Warning
Errors
General Information is self-explanatory in most cases and not specifically listed here. The most important warnings and errors concerning the production are shown in the following chart:
Warnings
Instruction
Description/action
2100: Really set default values?
Default values will be set. Previously made settings can be lost.
2104: Local processing of the current wire will be deleted.
While selecting a Processing from the library, all previously
made local Processing settings will be lost.
2105: Reset production state and
start production?
The programmed amount of wires has been produced, the production state must be reset before the production can be continued.
2115: Store current wire data in
file?
The settings made in the wire screen are not saved yet (Menu
„[2]-Save current" not executed) and can be saved now.
2500: Protected mode active! Axis
may be moved unlimited.
Caution: Look out, mechanical stop may be hit! The machine
may be damaged in this mode if handled improperly.
2600: USB memory stick not
found.
Insert stick (it may take up to 1 minute after inserting the stick
until it is found by the machine). Only sticks supplied by Schleuniger shall be used.
3000: Update entry in Processing
library?
Caution: All wire files linked to this Processing will also be
changed.
3003: Update entry in Processing
library?
Caution: All data linked to this Processing will also be changed.
3009: Modified data was not
saved. Continue anyway?
The changed Raw Material or Processing data have not been
saved yet and will be discarded if continuing.
3015: Checksum error in .....file File File defective. Delete file and enter file data again.
3300: No Zero cut done First piece See chapter "12.2 Messages (Page 110)".
may have a wrong length.
3302: PreFeeder fault.
The PreFeeder has not been connected properly. Check the
cable connection to the PreFeeder device! PreFeeder is possibly
defective.
3303: No pedal detected.
Pedal not connected properly or defective.
3304: No CableCoiler detected.
The CableCoiler has not been connected properly. Check the
cable connection to the CableCoiler device! CableCoiler is possibly defective.
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
137|230
14. Diagnostics / troubleshooting
Errors
Instruction
Description/action
4407: Failed to load language.
Carry out the machine software update again "20.3 Machine
software (Page 196)".
4408: Unable to find file for language.
Carry out the machine software update again. See chapter "20.3
Machine software (Page 196)".
4416: No access with current user
level.
See chapter "13.4.9 User levels/password protection (Page 121)".
4602: Backup failed.
USB memory stick full, not formatted or defective.
4603: Restore failed.
Data on the USB memory stick not valid or stick defective.
4604: Current software version
does not support data format of
the selected item.
Carry out the machine software update again. See chapter "20.3
Machine software (Page 196)". Use the latest version!
5041: File is incompatible to the
current software version. Version
of file..........
Carry out the machine software update again. See chapter "20.3
Machine software (Page 196)". Use the latest version!
5303: Wire end switch detects no
wire.
No wire loaded / wire end switch on wrong position / wire used
up during production.
5308/5316: Cut axis was blocked.
Too thick cable loaded / cut axis feed speed too high / blades
mounted improperly.
5321: Error on fan electronics.
Fan blocked / ventilator filter dirty. Fan defective, replace fan,
see "17.10 Maintenance / repair work (Page 184)".
5332/5333: Check spacing
between the texts.
Areas programmed to close successive! Feed speed set too fast
for the communication with the printer.
5336: Machine overheated!
Check ventilator filter. Possibly fan defective / fan exhaust
blocked / ambient temperature too high.
5602: Software version mismatch. Refer to the software compatibility list on the „Software release
Cayman and machine cannot com- notes“ CD-ROM.
municate.
14.2
DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTIONS IN THE CONTROL SOFTWARE
The machine is equipped with a comfortable diagnostics software, which is used to monitor the state
of the machine and the connected peripheral devices. Here the user can check the parts of the
machine and the peripheral devices in case of an error condition.
14.2.1 Overview control software
Available view modes
In the "Configuration", the settings can be managed in the so called "Text" or „Graphic“ mode.
138|230
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
14. Diagnostics / troubleshooting
Text mode
Graphic mode
The screens to the system components are
invoked through menus.
The individual system components are shown
graphically. The corresponding screens are
invoked through function keys directly.
To toggle between "Graphic mode" and "Text mode", see chapter "13.4.7 User interface (Page 120)".
Menu structure "Text mode"
Main menu
Diagnostics
Pre-processing
Machine
Post-processing
Internal interfaces
External Interfaces
Versions
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
139|230
14. Diagnostics / troubleshooting
Graphic view
In this screen, the desired part of the machine or the peripheral device to be set, can be selected
directly. The footer line in the screen changes accordingly. The settings in the particular screens are
described detailed in the "Text mode".
1
2
3
4
15
5
14
6
13
7
12
11
1
Inkjet:
▄
▄
2
▄
▄
▄
3
8
Serial 2:
▄
▄
▄
▄
[F2]-MECHANICS
▄
▄
▄
CableCoiler:
▄
▄
5
▄
▄
6
13
[F2]-OUTPUTS
[F2]-DONGLE
HotStamp:
▄
▄
▄
140|230
[F2]-PEDAL
Connector USB:
▄
14
[F2]-CABLECOILER
[F4]-WIRESTACKER
[F5]-I/O RESERVE
[F6]-UNIVERS. POST-PROCESSING
Pedal:
▄
[F2]-WIRESTACKER
[F4]-UNIVERS. POST-PROCESSING
Internal electrical outputs:
▄
12
[F2]-CABLECOILER
[F4]-UNIVERS. POST-PROCESSING
WireStacker:
[F2]-PREFEEDER
[F4]-HOTSTAMP
[F6]-UNIVERS. PRE-PROCESSING
11 Connector postfeed:
▄
4
[F2]-INKJET
10 Connector HS/PF and Prefeed:
[F2]-SW-VERSION
[F3]-HW-VERSIONS
[F4]-HW-EXTENSION VERSIONS VERSIONS
[F6]-PANEL
Mechanical Functions:
▄
9
[F2]-INKJET
[F4]-UNIVERS. PRE-PROCESSING
Info about Versions and total Counter:
▄
9
10
[F2]-HOTSTAMP
[F4]-UNIVERS. PRE-PROCESSING
[F2]-DONGLE
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
14. Diagnostics / troubleshooting
7
Internal electrical inputs:
▄
[F2]-INPUTS
15
PreFeeder:
▄
▄
8
[F2]-PREFEEDER
[F4]-UNIVERS. PRE-PROCESSING
Serial 3 (Inkjet):
▄
[F2]-INKJET
Main menu
Menu level: 5
14.2.2 Pre-processing
This checks the condition of prefeeders and marking devices
(HotStamp).
Menu level: 5-1
PreFeeder
Menu level: 5-1-1
Prefeeder (Schleuniger „PreFeeder“).
Present: (Yes/no). Shows the state of the signal "PFPRESENT".
Ready: (Yes/no). Shows the state of the signal "PFREADY".
Stop: (On/off). Switches the signal "PFOUT" on/off.
HotStamp
Menu level: 5-1-2
Status: (Yes/no). Shows the state of the signal "HSINPUT".
Activate: (On/off). Switches the signal "HSOUT" on/off.
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
141|230
14. Diagnostics / troubleshooting
Inkjet printer device
Menu level: 5-1-3
Marking device (Inkjet printer).
[F2]-GET STATE: Get state of printer driver.
[F3]-PRINT: Test print-out.
[F4]-PRINTGO: Checks if the "Print go" signal is sent to the
printer properly.
[F5]-CALIBRATION: Perform the printer calibration.
[F6]-SELECT 1<>2: If more than 1 printer is activated in the
"Configuration" (symbol only appears in this case).
Universal pre-processing
Menu level: 5-1-4
Interface inputs can be monitored and the outputs can be
tested here.
Wire detected: (Yes/no). Displays the state of the signal
"LDETECT" if a cable is connected, the state should be "Yes".
Output driver overload: (Yes/no). Yes > an error (short circuit) occurs in the wiring of the "PF / Prefeed" or "HS / PF"
connector.
Input 0-3: (On/off). Shows the state of the signal "LIN0 LIN3".
Activity-LED: (On/off). Turns the LED on the connector "PF/Prefeed" on/off.
Output 0-3: (On/off). Switches the outputs "LOUT0" - "LOUT3" on/off.
[F2]-AUTOMATIC TEST: Performs a full functional test on the universal Pre processing interface.
For this test a Schleuniger test adapter is required! See „Parts Catalog“.
14.2.3 Machine
Menu level: 5-2
This checks the state of the machine and its interfaces.
Mechanics
Menu level: 5-2-1
Cover switch: "O" = Cover open
Length encoder: Value is counted up or down while the
encoder is moved. The value is signed.
Caution: The encoder can only be shown in the diagnostics.
It has no other function in the machine.
[F2]-CLEAR: Reset value.
Wire end switch: K = wire found.
▄
▄
142|230
[F2]-LIFT: Lift up the wire end switch.
[F3]-RELEASE: Lower the wire end switch.
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
14. Diagnostics / troubleshooting
Transport left/transport right/blade change/cut: E = end switch active/„K“ = Wire found.
▄
▄
[F2]-DIAGNOSTICS: guided diagnose.
[F3]-HOME: Initialization.
In safe mode the axis can be moved in small and large steps ([F2]/[F5]).
Guide left: O“ = upper sensor active/„U“ = lower sensor active.
▄
▄
▄
[F2]-UP: Swivel guide tube upwards.
[F3]-DOWN: Swivel guide tube downwards.
[F4]-DIAGNOSE: Move guide automatically.
Guide right: A = Outer sensor active/I = Inner sensor active.
▄
▄
▄
[F2]-OUT: Move guide outwards.
[F3]-IN: Move guide inwards.
[F3]-DIAGNOSE: Move guide automatically.
Air jet: (On/off)
▄
▄
[F2]-ON: Switch on Air jet.
[F3]-OFF: Switch off air jet.
Jam detector: „W“ = Jammed wire detected on wire exit point.
Caution: The jam detector can only be shown in the diagnostics. It has no other function in the
machine.
Internal interfaces
Menu level: 5-2-2
Panel
Menu level: 5-2-2-1
Connections to the user panel the screen and the key functions.
[F2]-TEST: Tests all the keys on the panel. For testing, press
each key asked in sequence.
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
143|230
14. Diagnostics / troubleshooting
Internal inputs
Menu level: 5-2-2-2
Inputs to the motor drivers, magnet drivers and the battery.
This components are monitored with sensors and trigger an
alarm if an over temperature condition occurs.
Temperature panel: Resides on the electronics of the user
panel (the unit is shown according to the "Configuration" in
chapter "13.4.7 User interface (Page 120)").
Temperature amplifier: Resides on mechatronic PCB (temperature raises if heavy motor movement appears).
Temperature magnet driver: Resides on mechatronic PCB (Temperature raises if heavy magnet
movement driving the guides appears).
Amplifier overheat: If heavy motor movements occur, respectively the machine is stressed intense,
an over temperature condition may occur.
Magnet driver overheat: If heavy magnet movements occur, respectively the machine is stressed
intense, an over temperature condition may occur.
Temperature limits:
Panel = 75°C
Power amp = 65° C
Magnet drivers = 65° C
If the limits stated below are reached, the machine switches to "Safe mode", see chapter . Any drives
are switched off thereby.
Battery state: The battery is used for the internal clock (is also checked with each machine boot process).
Internal outputs
Menu level: 5-2-2-3
Output to the ventilators and valves. The machine drives the
internal fans on the left side of the housing, temperature
controlled. In case of an over temperature condition, the fans
should be checked for proper operation.
Fan mechanical compartment 1: (On/off). The fan can be
switched on or off here manually.
Fan mechanical compartment 2: (On/off). The fan can be
switched on or off here manually.
Fan electronics compartment: (On/off). The fan can be switched on or off here manually.
PNP Reserve 0 (J11): (On/off). Spare internal output for controlling additional devices (connector
location).
Air jet: (On/off). Operating the air jet unit manually if available.
NPN Reserve 1 - 3 (J12 - J14): (On/off) Spare internal output for controlling additional devices (connector location).
I/O reserve
Menu level: 5-2-2-4
In 0 - 2 (J20, J21, J23): (On/off) Spare internal outputs for
controlling additional devices (connector location).
In MB: (On/off). Spare internal outputs for controlling additional devices (connector location).
144|230
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
14. Diagnostics / troubleshooting
External Interfaces
Menu level: 5-2-3
Pedal, interface connections for pre- and Post processing
devices.
Pedal
Menu level: 5-2-3-1
Present: (Yes/no).
Status: (On/off). „On“ > as long as the pedal is pressed.
Universal pre-processing
Menu level: 5-2-3-2
See chapter "14.2.2.4 Universal pre-processing (Page 142)".
[F2]-AUTOMATIC TEST: Starts the automatic connection
test. Thereby the state of all in- and outputs changes. A
Schleuniger test adapter is required for this! See „Parts Catalog“.
Universal post-processing
Menu level: 5-2-3-3
See chapter "14.2.4.3 Universal post-processing (Page 147)".
[F2]-AUTOMATIC TEST: Starts the automatic connection
test. Thereby the state of all in- and outputs changes. A
Schleuniger test adapter is required for this! See under „Parts
Catalog“.
Cayman dongle
Menu level: 5-2-3-4
Here the user will find information about the dongle, which
must be connected in conjunction with the wire processing
software Cayman.
Serial ID: A unique identification number of the dongle connected to the OmniStrip 9450.
Version: Version of Cayman for which the dongle was programmed for.
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
145|230
14. Diagnostics / troubleshooting
Versions
Menu level: 5-2-4
General information about the soft- and hardware components of the machine.
▄
▄
▄
▄
Soft- and Firmware-Versions
Total counter
Machine identification number
Available Memory
HW versions
Menu level: 5-2-4-1
This information are only important if the service representative needs them in correlation with an error (to perform a
detailed analysis or to send the data to Schleuniger for a
detailed clarification).
[F2]-MAIN: Shows the version of the main PCB.
[F3]-MECHATRONIC: Shows the version of the mechatronic
PCB.
[F4]-PANEL: Shows the version of the panels.
SW versions
Menu level: 5-2-4-2
Total count: The total of all produced cables on this
machine. This counter counts up continually and cannot be
reset by the user.
OS software: Displays the version number of the installed
machine software.
This information are only important if the service representative needs them in correlation with an error (to perform a
detailed analysis or to send the data to Schleuniger for
detailed clarification).
Expansion board version
Menu level: 5-2-4-3
Board present: Checks if an expansion board is installed.
FPGA ready: Checks if the hardware has initialized.
Board Type: The installed hardware type, firmware version.
146|230
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
14. Diagnostics / troubleshooting
14.2.4 Post-processing
Menu level: 5-3
This checks the condition of Post-processing devices like
WireStackers or CableCoilers and certain functions can be
controlled as well.
In this sub screens the inputs and outputs can be tested.
WireStacker
Menu level: 5-3-1
Ejection: Switches the output "STACKER" on/off.
CableCoiler
Menu level: 5-3-2
Present: (Yes/no). Shows the state of the signal "CCREADY".
Ready: (Yes/no). Shows the state of the signal "CCSTART".
Stop: (On/off). Switches the output "CCSTOP" on/off.
Binding position: (On/off). Switches the output "CCBINDING" on/off.
Ejection: (On/off). Switches the output "CCEJECT" on/off.
Universal post-processing
Menu level: 5-3-3
Wire detected: (Yes/no). Displays the state of the signal
"RDETECT" if a cable is connected, the state should be "Yes".
Output driver overload: (Yes/no). "Yes" > an error (short circuit) occurs in the wiring of the "WS/postfeed" connector.
Input 0-3: (Yes/no). Shows the state of the signal "RIN0 RIN3".
Activity-LED: (On/off). Turns the LED on the "WS/postfeed"
connector on/off.
Output 0-3: (On/off). Switches the outputs "ROUT0" - "ROUT3" on/off.
[F2]-AUTOMATIC TEST: Performs a full functional test on the universal Post processing interface.
For this test a Schleuniger test adapter is required! See „Parts Catalog“.
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
147|230
14. Diagnostics / troubleshooting
148|230
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
15. Data management / upgrades / services
DATA MANAGEMENT / UPGRADES / SERVICES
This chapter contains information for the backup and restore of data and the software upgrade. Additionally we can change settings concerning the protocol reporting during the production.
The instructions in this chapter must be carried out by qualified personnel!
NOTICE
Caution, data loss!
For the data backup compulsory use the USB memory stick delivered with
this machine, as not all USB types are recognized by the software, see document "Parts Catalog”. Improper use may lead to data loss! The USB memory
stick must be formatted with the data file system „FAT“.
15.1
MAIN MENU SERVICES
▄
▄
▄
▄
▄
15.2
Data backup: Saves all data of the OmniStrip 9450 to an
external storage media.
Data restore: Loading back saved data to the
OmniStrip 9450 from an external storage media.
Software-upgrade: To keep the operating software of
the OmniStrip 9450 up to date, a software upgrade can be
performed.
Cold start of the machine: Full initializing of the
machine without the need to switch of and on the main
switch.
Logging: Managing the log files.
DATA BACKUP
The data of the OmniStrip 9450 are saved to an USB memory stick. To perform this action, a formatted
FAT16 USB memory stick must be in the slot.
Menu level: 6-1
Before saving the file a file name can be typed in. As default,
the system submits a file name (date, machine name).
Already to the USB memory stick saved backup files can be
deleted again with [F6]. For this, the corresponding file must
be selected in the file list with the navigation keys first.
Wire data from data backups can also be used for the data
import.
15.3
DATA RESTORE
Saved data is loaded back from the USB memory stick to the OmniStrip 9450. To perform this action, a
formatted USB memory stick with already saved data must reside in the slot.
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
149|230
15. Data management / upgrades / services
Menu level: 6-2
The user can select the desired file from the list with the navigation keys.
Caution: Any actual settings on the OmniStrip 9450 are irrevocably lost if executing this command! The procedure is
invoked with [F1].
From this machine only: Displays only the backup files
saved on this machine.
This defines if the old configuration data of the machine shall
be overwritten.
Already to the USB memory stick saved backup files can be deleted again with [F6]. For this, the corresponding file must be selected in the file list with the navigation keys first.
15.4
SOFTWARE-UPGRADE
On the OmniStrip 9450 two types of upgrades can be carried out:
The main wire processing software of the machine (Firmware).
The operating system Windows CE which is responsible for the user interface (input/output of
data).
▄
▄
15.4.1 Preparation
To be able to perform an upgrade on the OmniStrip 9450, the upgrade must be available on an USB
memory stick formated with FAT 16 and the size must be not more then 2 GB (is normally delivered
with a new machine).
The upgrade data can be loaded from the „Schleuniger Cayman and Cut & Strip installation CD”
and/or the Schleuniger distributor supplies it.
To load the Windows CE to an USB memory stick and to perform the upgrade, there is a special loading procedure, see chapter "20.3.2 Windows CE Upgrade (Page 200)".
To load the wire processing software (Firmware) of the OmniStrip 9450 to an USB memory stick, there
is under „Upgrade Tools” also a special installation program available, see chapter "20.3.1 Installation
of upgrade tools (Page 196)".
15.4.2 Data backup
Before any upgrade, an automatic backup of all actual data is performed. This data must not be
restored after the upgrade, the original data remain in memory while upgrading.
1»
Connect the USB memory stick to the OmniStrip 9450 and press [6]-Services > [3]-Software
upgrade.
Menu level: 6-3
2»
Edit the file name (field "Save as")
Data backup: If the stick is recognized properly
by the machine, the old saved files are displayed
automatically.
Caution: Do not remove the USB memory stick
from the OmniStrip 9450 during the backup
operation.
150|230
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
15. Data management / upgrades / services
3»
Press [F1] to start the backup operation and
wait until the prompt for the upgrade is
shown.
4»
Remove the USB memory stick and press
[F1] to start the upgrade operation.
At the end of the operation, the machine is started again and switched to the upgrade mode.
15.4.3 Upgrading
After the cold start, the display of the OmniStrip 9450 is switched to "Upgrade mode".
NOTICE
Caution data loss!
Observe that the machine is not switched off during the software upgrading procedure.
1»
Select language.
[F1]: Switch to English language.
[F7]: Switch to German language.
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
151|230
15. Data management / upgrades / services
2»
Connect USB memory stick to the
OmniStrip 9450 and press [F1].
[F1]: Continue to next setting.
[F7]: Interrupts the upgrade process and
changes to the normal production screen.
3»
Searching for upgrades on the USB memory
stick.
4»
Select the upgrade file from the list with the
navigation keys and confirm with [F1]. (In
this example: „Version 00.92“).
[F1]: Confirm selection.
[F7]: Return to the beginning of the upgrade
process, „Step2“.
5»
Check if the version number being installed
corresponds with the installed file. If no
upgrade file was found, repeat the step
"Unzip upgrade file".
6»
If O. K. confirm the upgrade process with
[F1].
[F1]: Start upgrade installation.
[F7]: Return to the beginning of the upgrade
process, „Step2“.
152|230
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
15. Data management / upgrades / services
Copying logging data.
7»
After the installation, terminate with
[ENTER].
Ä The upgrade process is finished now.
The machine is started automatically.
The upgrade procedure was performed successfully.
The data (configuration, wire, etc.) are still available on the machine.
15.5
COLD START OF THE MACHINE
Menu level: 6-4
Cold start of the machine without switching off and on the
machine.
While performing a cold start on the machine, no data are
lost.
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
153|230
15. Data management / upgrades / services
15.6
LOGGING DATA
Menu level: 6-5
During production a log file is written and events are monitored continually.
15.6.1 Update log
This command assures that already registered events not yet written to the log are saved immediately. This command must only be executed if the Schleuniger service representative advises the user to
do so.
15.6.2 Export log
The updated log file can be saved to an USB memory stick to e. g analyze the data on a PC independently from the OmniStrip 9450.
15.6.3 Delete log
The log directory can be removed completely from the OmniStrip 9450. A warning message, "If the
data definitely should be deleted" is shown.
15.6.4 Logging settings
Menu level: 6-5-4
Level: (Off/error/warning/info/debug) Defines for which
event a log shall be produced.
Log groups: (Off/error/warning/info/debug)
Log Inkjet (DLL): (On/off)
This settings are only important if the service representative
needs them in correlation with an error (to perform a detailed
analysis or to send the data to our factory for detailed clarification).
154|230
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
16. Programming hints / examples
PROGRAMMING HINTS / EXAMPLES
The Programming steps on the OmniStrip 9450 are best described with practical examples.
For the following programming examples, the following is presumed:
▄
▄
▄
▄
▄
▄
The user got familiar with chapter "5.6.1 Operator panel (Page 33)", and "5.3 Overview of components (Page 28)".
Disengage the emergency stop button.
Wire type 1: Standard wire 0.75 mm2
Wire type 2: Power cord 3-conductor 1.0 mm2 (for chapter "16.3 Multi-conductor cable (power cord)
(Page 162)").
Peripheral devices: Hooked up properly and fully functional, see chapter "16.4 Wire marking
(Page 165)".
The user is working in "Single mode", see chapter "9 Simple programming mode (Page 69)".
We recommend to begin with the first programming example "Cut".
Make sure that the settings on the OmniStrip 9450 have been entered correctly.
The data used in these programming examples are guiding principles and may vary depending on
the nature of the wire. The programming must be optimized by testing if necessary.
The instructions in this chapter must be carried out by the operator personnel!
NOTICE
Caution, property damage!
If the user intends not to work with the default values calculated by the
machine, practical experience in general wire processing is assumed.
16.1
CUT
16.1.1 Default setting
In the first example, some standard wires are cut to a length predefined in the program and then
ejected.
Standard wires
Cross section
Wire length
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
10 pcs.
0.75 mm2
500 mm
155|230
16. Programming hints / examples
16.1.2 Basic settings
1»
Switch on the machine (after initializing, the
"Wire" screen is shown first).
The main screen for programming wires is
shown. This is the base screen for handling all
the settings concerning the production of a wire.
In the header line the previously produced wire
is shown (if any).
Observe Tooltip!
Most screens are associated with a tooltip, where
the user can find helpful information about the
selected item or for the whole screen shown.
2»
[F1]-OK (back to the "Wire- and Wire List
files" screen).
3»
[4]-New.
Alternatively also [F5]-WIRE LIST could be selected here, which would invoke the Wire list mode.
4»
[F3]-SINGLE WIRE (a single wire is chosen
for the production).
5»
Enter the wire name in the field below. For
our example = „Stranded 0.75 mm2“.
[F1]-OK
6»
Select Raw Material with [@] (for this example = „mm2, stranded“).
8» [ENTER] (the field "Wire diameter" is highlighted).
9» Enter the wire cross section via the numeric
keypad (in this example "0.75").
(is important for this example to determine
the contact pressure of the transport belts).
10» [F5]-DEFAULT (Default values are calculated automatically by the OmniStrip 9450).
7»
156|230
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
16. Programming hints / examples
Caution: After executing this command, any
previous entered Processing data are irrevocably
lost!
11» [F1]-OK (accept the pre-calculated values
from the machine).
12» Load the wire 0.75 mm2 on the machine.
13» [SINGLE] (production will be started and a wire be produced).
14» Inspect the wire length with a ruler.
If the wire exactly meets the entered wire length, the programming for the cutting to length is
accomplished and series production can begin. To get familiar with the length correction procedure, in case of a length difference we recommend to continue with the chapter "16.1.3 Correction:
Wire length (Page 157)".
16.1.3 Correction: Wire length
In an example of a length correction we describe parts of the processing settings.
1»
Check the settings in the "Configuration", chapter "13.4.3 Transport units (Page 118)", and correct if needed.
Changing parameters in the "Configuration" assumes an advanced understanding of the
OmniStrip 9450.
2»
In the screen „Wire“ select [F6]-PROCESSING - FEED.
Settings for feeding the wire.
Additional screens may be accessed through the
function keys (Elements, Cut, Options). For this
refer also to the advanced examples.
3»
[F+] (shifts the footer line to the next level).
4»
[F2]-CALCULATOR (displays the "Calculator" screen for the „%-Correction“).
Enter the measured length.
[F1]-OK (the calculator finds the %-Value
automatically and moves it to the field %Correction in the "Processing - feed" screen.
5»
6»
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
157|230
16. Programming hints / examples
7»
[RUN] (produce wire again).
As for the "Total" only one wire was entered, the
production state is set to complete already after
this wire. Before continuing with the production,
the production state must be reset first!
8»
[F1]-OK (confirm the info "Production complete").
All the programmed wire data are saved in a buffer so far (not in the wire database) but will not
get lost even if the machine was switched off.
16.2
PARTIAL STRIP WITH WINDOW
16.2.1 Default setting
Cut to length, strip left and right and insert a window.
Standard wires
Cross section
Wire length
Left partial strip, stripping length
Right partial strip, stripping length
Window right, position
10 pcs.
0.75 mm2
500 mm
20 mm
20 mm
70 mm
Pull-off length
Pull-off length
Window length
10 mm
10 mm
10 mm
16.2.2 Basic settings
1»
2»
3»
Switch on the machine (the "Wire" screen is shown).
[F1]-OK (back to the "Wire- and Wire List files" screen).
[F7] (ignore warning „Store current wire data in file?”).
4»
[4]-New (Confirm warning "Changed data
not saved" with [F1]-OK.
Caution: Previously entered data are irrevocably
lost.
158|230
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
16. Programming hints / examples
5»
6»
7»
8»
9»
10»
11»
12»
[F3]-SINGLE WIRE
Wire name = „Stranded 0.75 mm2“ from previous.
[F1]-OK
Select Raw Material with [@] (for this example = „mm2, stranded“).
Set wire cross section (for this example = „0.75“).
With [ENTER] go to the left wire end and set parameters according to the next screen.
With [ENTER] go to the right wire end and set parameters according to the next screen.
[ENTER]
To change the wire end setting, the following
keys may be used:
▄
▄
[EDIT] (pop- up field is shown; the wire ends
can be selected with the [ ARROW KEYS]
and confirmed with [ENTER]).
[@] (The available wire ends are shown with
each key stroke consecutively, then confirm
with [ENTER]).
13» Enter all the stripping parameters in the
order according to the following screen (forwards to the next field with [ENTER]):
▄
▄
▄
▄
▄
▄
Window position right = 70 mm
Window length right = 10 mm
Stripping length right = 20 mm
Pull-off length right = 10 mm
Stripping length left = 20 mm
Pull-off length left = 10 mm
1
2
3
4
(1) - Pull-off length
(2) - Stripping length
(3) - Window length
(4) - Windows position
The fields may be selected with various keys:
▄
▄
▄
[ENTER] (move to next field).
[ I< ] (move to previous field).
[ARROW KEYS] (move in all directions).
14» [F5]-DEFAULT (confirm warning "overwrite"
with [F1]-OK).
15» Load the wire 0.75 mm2 on the machine.
16» [SINGLE] (a sample wire will be produced).
Not every wire is produced error free if working just with the default values. In chapter "16.2.3 Correction: Finding the adequate Processing parameters (Page 159)" we explain, how to improve the
product quality by altering the Processing parameters.
16.2.3 Correction: Finding the adequate Processing parameters
This example assumes that some strands of the wire are separated and stripped cohesive with the
insulation.
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
159|230
16. Programming hints / examples
1»
2»
[F6]-PROCESSING - FEED (opens the screen
„Processing -feed“). In the footer line, the
key symbols for "cut, options and elements"
are shown).
Chose [F3]-PROCESSING - ELEMENTS
(apparently something is wrong with the
stripping process).
Wire incised to much > increase the diameter.
Blades scratch on the conductor > increase the
way back.
Do not select [F4]-CUT here, it is only appropriate for cutting through the wire and the positioning during feeding.
If the wire is not processed properly, proceed
according to chapter "9.8 „Processing - elements"
screen (Page 84)". "Stripping mode - regrip - properties", regrip must be switched on thereto!
3»
[SINGLE] (Check wire and if necessary correct until the incision is correct. If, due to the blades
touching the wire, still any scrape marks appear after stripping, the "Way back" (D) can be
increased. This ensures that the conductor is still separated properly after the incision, but the
conductor is not bruised anymore.
If even this does not solve the problem fully, change the stripping mode to "Regrip".
4»
[F1]-OK (data are saved to the wire buffer).
Not all processing problems are identified that easy. Often the stripping operation is performed in a
speed rate, where the user is not able to recognize any details.
In this case the step by step mode is helpful:
1»
[STOP] (machine switches to step by step
mode).
Step by step mode:
Each movement step is accomplished with every
keystroke. But synchronous movements are still
performing simultaneously.
2»
160|230
[F1]-YES (activate step by step mode).
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
16. Programming hints / examples
3»
[SINGLE] (start wire production) (may also
be started with [RUN]).
Navigation while in step by step mode:
[F1]: Next single step.
[F3]: Single steps are processed automatically
accordant to a pre-defined waiting time.
[F5]: Leave the mode, continue the production
normally.
[F7]: Cancel.
4»
[F3] (Wire will be produced in the automated step by step mode).
Navigation during the production:
[F2]: Longer pause.
[F3]: Interrupt.
[F4]: Shorter pause.
[F5]: Continue production without pause.
5»
Inspect the quality of the produced wire.
16.2.4 Correction: Optimize the production speed
The default values are calculated in a way that most common wire types can be produced properly.
But this safety is at the cost of the productivity. The following represents a procedure to improve it.
1»
2»
3»
4»
5»
6»
7»
Increase the total counter (Total = 10).
[ENTER] (the field "Batch off" is selected).
[@]: Switch on the batch operation.
[ENTER]
Enter batch amount (Batch = 5).
[ENTER]
If the production state is "> 0", reset it with [F3].
8»
[RUN] (if still in single step mode, press
[F5]).
The following information is an aid in optimizing
the production:
Pieces/hour: Amount of wires produced during
one hour.
Last wire [ms]: Shows the time the machine has
consumed to produce the previous wire.
9»
[F7]-CANCEL
10» [F6]-PROCESSING - FEED
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
161|230
16. Programming hints / examples
11» [F4]-PROCESSING - CUT
Position - While feeding: Waiting position,
where the blades move to, while feeding the
wire.
To optimize the production speed, decrease this
value:
Decrease the value from "10.46" to "6.0".
12» [RUN] (start new production).
13» Observe new values (pieces / hour and last wire) and if necessary repeat the optimization.
14» [F6]-FEED (increase speed).
Speed/ramp (acceleration): These settings
change the feeding speed and the ramp (acceleration) of the transport belts; whereas 0 is the
smallest and 9 the largest selectable value.
15» Change „Speed/ramp (acceleration)“ to
8 / 8.
16» [RUN] (start new production).
As we can see after this test run, the wire is produced at a similar speed rate even if the speed is set
to a lower value.
The user will get familiar with quickly finding the optimal values by experimenting with different
values, and by the help of the feedback from the "Production" screen.
16.3
MULTI-CONDUCTOR CABLE (POWER CORD)
16.3.1 Default setting
In this example a standard power cord is produced.
Power cord
Cross section
Wire length
Jacket stripping
Partial strip of the inner wires
162|230
50 pcs.
3 x 1 mm2
200 mm
Stripping length
Stripping length
40 mm
8 mm
Pull-off length
Pull-off length
45 mm
6 mm
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
16. Programming hints / examples
16.3.2 Basic settings
1»
2»
Switch on the machine (the "Wire" screen appears).
Mount the following blades in the OmniStrip 9450 and set them up in the "Configuration":
▄
1. Position: Radius-blade, suitable for the desired jacket (in this example Ø6.8).
▄
2. Position: Multiple radius blades, suitable for the inner wires (in this example Ø1.5 / 3wires) + combing device.
3»
4»
5»
6»
7»
[1]-Wire (as the user resides in the main menu after the blade change).
Create a new single wire.
Enter wire name = „Power cord 1.0 mm2“.
Select the Raw Material "Power cord" with [@].
[ENTER] (screen changes the appearance; the wire representation for "Power cord" is shown).
8»
Measure the dimensions on the wire and
enter them according to the screen below:
▄
Outer diameter of jacket = 6.8 mm
▄
Inner diameter of jacket = 5.0 mm
▄
Outer diameter of the insulation of a single wire = 2.5 mm
▄
Diameter of a single wire = 1.2 mm
(1) Jacket outer diameter
(2) Outer diameter of the insulation of a single
wire
(3) Diameter of a single wire
(4) Jacket inner diameter
1
2
3
4
9»
Increase the "Total" (Total = 50), switch on
"Batch" (Batch = 2), set the wire length to
200 mm.
10» Go to the right wire end with [ENTER] and
select as wire end "Power cord".
11» Type in the stripping values according to
the next screen and confirm with [ENTER].
(1) Wire end power cord
(2) Stripping values will be calculated automatically
1
2
12» [F5]-DEFAULT (confirm the warning "Overwrite" with [F1]-OK).
13» [F1]-OK (confirm the warning "Check blades", the blades have been mounted already in step
2).
For cutting through and stripping the jacket, the "Radius blade" is set on position 1 and for stripping
the inner wires the blade is set on position 2. The blade type and the size must be observed physically, as the machine cannot recognize them itself.
14» Loading wire on the machine.
15» [SINGLE] (a first sample wire will be produced).
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
163|230
16. Programming hints / examples
16» If the inner wires could not be laid side by
side properly during combing, lower the
"Combing position" with [F2]-APPLICATION.
17» [SINGLE] (a first sample wire will be produced).
18» [F1]-OK (back to the wire screen).
16.3.3 Correction: Conductor incised too much and blades scratch the wire
1»
2»
[F6]-PROCESSING (altering the processing values).
[F3]-ELEMENTS.
[F3] and [F5] (selection of processing step).
With this multi-conductor cable, there are 3 processing steps (strip comb, strip).
4»
Select processing step with [F3] or [F5] (for
this example: „strip inner wires“ = „3/3“).
Go to "Diameter" with [ENTER].
5»
6»
7»
Adjust the diameter.
[SINGLE] (produce a test wire).
Inspect produced wire and necessarily correct it again.
3»
16.3.4 Copy wire end to the left side.
164|230
1»
Move to the left end with [ENTER].
2»
Select "Copy wire end" with [@].
3»
[ENTER] (copies all settings from the right
end to the left, all settings of the operations
are carry over this way).
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
16. Programming hints / examples
[SINGLE] (produce another test wire).
Check for proper wire quality.
[F1]-OK (back to the "Wire- and Wire List files" screen).
[F7] (ignore warning „Store current wire data in file?”).
[2]-Save current (save the wire, under the name previously entered, permanently to the wire
database).
9» [F1]-OK (confirm message „Wire saved“).
10» [1]-Edit current (back to the "Wire" screen).
11» [RUN] (production starts).
4»
5»
6»
7»
8»
16.4
WIRE MARKING
16.4.1 Default setting
In this example, wires are cut, stripped on both sides and marked with a HotStamp respectively with
an Inkjet printer (as available) on different positions.
Standard wires
Cross section
Wire length
Stripping length
Pull-off length
10 pcs.
0.75 mm2
500 mm
5 mm
3 mm
16.4.2 Basic settings
1»
2»
3»
4»
5»
6»
7»
8»
Connect a HotStamp device.
Switch on the machine (the "Wire" screen
appears).
Create a new single wire, wire name =
“Marking“.
Enter settings according to the screen.
[F5]-Default (confirm warning "overwrite"
with [F1]-OK).
Load the wire 0.75 mm2 on the machine.
[SINGLE] (produce wire).
Inspect for proper quality.
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
165|230
16. Programming hints / examples
16.4.3 Add an area with a HotStamp
1»
2»
3»
[F2]-APPLICATION
[F4]-AREA
[F4]-ADD (add a new area).
4»
Enter the values according to the screen.
(1) - Repetition of the markings in an area.
1
Last position
5»
6»
3. Position
2. Position
Distance
1. Position
[SINGLE] (produce the next wire, due to the distance from the HotStamp to the OmniStrip 9450
a slug is produced) (confirm info "Eject slug" with [F1]-OK).
Check the position and the quality of the marking.
16.4.4 Add an area with an Inkjet printer
1»
Enter the values according to the screen.
[F4]-PROPERTIES (is only shown if "Inkjet printer" is selected).
Settings for the font type are made here in the
"Properties" screen.
Here the font size, the type, the color etc. can be
set according to the wire type.
166|230
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
16. Programming hints / examples
16.4.5 Production prepare
3»
4»
[SINGLE] (start production, wire will be produced).
[F1]-OK (confirm info „Eject slug“, the OmniStrip 9450 has just produced a second slug. To
reduce the slug to a minimum, the machine can be set in a way that at the end of a produced
wire the marking for the next wire is already in preparation).
[F1]-OK 4 x (back to the main menu).
[4]-Configuration > [2]-Machine > [6]-Production.
5»
6»
Switch on production prepare.
[F1]-OK 3 x (back to the main menu).
1»
2»
[1]-Wire.
[1]-Edit current.
[SINGLE] (start production. The first, not prepared wire is still produced with slug, but the next
wires will come out prepared already).
10» [SINGLE] (no slug is produced anymore).
7»
8»
9»
16.4.6 Switching off the area function temporarily
If the stripping quality is improper and the areas are programmed already, the printing function can
be switched off temporarily to save sealing sheets and wire material.
1»
2»
3»
4»
Go to the area symbol (area switch) with
[ENTER].
[@] (switch off all areas temporarily).
Correct the wire data, produce them,
inspect quality.
[@] (switch on all areas).
16.4.7 Managing areas
1»
2»
3»
4»
[F2]-APPLICATION
[F4]-AREA
[F+] (go to next level of footer line).
[F2]-ADD (add a new area).
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
167|230
16. Programming hints / examples
5»
Add data according to the screen below
(adds a new marking on the left side of the
wire).
[F3] / [F5] Switch in-between the areas.
6»
7»
[SINGLE]
Inspect the produced wire.
8»
Check values in the area levels with [F+]
[F3]-BEFORE or [F+][F5]-AFTER.
[F2]: Add a new area.
[F3]: Position the selected area in the order,
before.
[F5]: Position the selected area in the order,
after.
[F6]: Delete the selected area.
16.5
CUSTOM APPLICATION
16.5.1 Default setting
In this example, wires are cut to length stripped on both sides and a window on the right with slitting
is inserted.
Standard wires
Cross section
Wire length
Stripping length
Pull-off length
10 pcs.
0.75 mm2
500 mm
5 mm
3 mm
Slitting operation in the right window
The wire is processed in multiple steps
168|230
4.
3.
2.
1.
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
16. Programming hints / examples
16.5.2 Basic settings
1»
2»
▄
▄
Switch on the machine (the "Wire" screen appears).
Mount the following blades in the machine:
1. Position: V-blade.
2. Position: suitable slitting blade (for this example Ø1.5 / 2.6). Here also the universal slitting
unit may be used, see chapter "5.9.2.1.5 Universal slitting unit (option) (Page 40)".
3»
[1]-Wire (as the user resides in the main menu after the blade change).
4»
5»
Create a new single wire, wire name = “Slitting“, according to the screen.
[F5]-DEFAULT
6»
7»
Load the wire 0.75 mm2 on the machine.
[SINGLE] (produce a test wire).
[F1]-OK (back to the "Wire- and Wire List files" screen).
[F1] (Store current wire data in file, save the wire under the name previously entered to the
wire database).
10» [F1] (confirm message).
11» [1]-Edit current (go to the "Wire" screen).
12» [F+][F6] (invoke the Library mode, previous data remain in the buffer)
8»
9»
13» [F+] (the footer line key symbol [F4] has
changed to the „Raw Material“ symbol).
New elements on the screen:
(1) - Selection Raw Material
(2) - Selection Processing
Single wire:
1
2
This describes the Raw Material composition
divided in layers. This way the machine knows
what it is processing.
For example he can define by means of the outer
diameter:
▄
▄
If the right wire is loaded.
Or it knows how many layers can be stripped
(thus if it is a stranded wire, only layer 2 or a
multi-conductor cable, where the layers 2 or
3 can be stripped).
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
Multi-conductor cable:
Single wire:
1
1
2
2
3
169|230
16. Programming hints / examples
14» Move to the right end with [ENTER].
15» [@] (select custom end).
Custom end (can only be selected in Library
mode).
16» [F2]-APPLICATION
(1) Observe the "position, length and direction"
here. They are taken over from the previous
stripping operation.
1
17» [F+] (move to next level of the footer line).
18» [F2]-ADD 3 x (adds 3 additional layers for this application). Enter values for the four columns
according to the screen below:
Operation 1
Operation 2
Operation 3
Operation 4
Layer
2
2
2
2
Mode
Strip
Strip
Slit
Strip
Step
Off
Off
Off
Off
Position
5
150
151
170
Length
3
5
18
5
Direction
>
<
<
>
Right guide
Auto
Auto
Auto
Auto
Right full strip
Processing
Processing
Processing
Processing
Local Processing element
Off
Off
Off
Off
Branches
--
--
--
--
19»
20»
21»
22»
23»
[STOP] (change to the single step mode).
[SINGLE] (start production).
Inspect wire and correct it if necessary, see previous examples.
Go back to the "Wire" screen.
Save the wire again (according to step 8).
16.5.3 Save Processing in the library
This saves the previously acquired Processing data, independently from the wire itself to a library in
the OmniStrip 9450.
170|230
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
16. Programming hints / examples
1»
2»
3»
Go back to the "Wire" screen.
[F6]-PROCESSING
[F+] (move to next level of the footer line).
4»
[F5]-SAVE AS (opens the "Processing: Save"
screen).
(1) - Enter the new name for the Processing here.
5»
6»
[F1]-OK (Save Processing data, confirm info
"Save file" with [F1]-OK. The Processing
data are now available for acquiring with
other wires).
1
[F1] 5x (back to the main menu).
16.5.4 Creating a new Raw Material
1»
[2]-Raw Material library (selecting Raw Material settings).
2»
3»
[1]-New (create a new Raw Material).
Enter the name for the Raw Material (in this
example = „Stranded 0.75 mm2 white“). For
this also refer to chapter „Raw Material“ in
the documentation of the „Schleuniger Wire
Processing Software Cayman“.
[F1]-OK
4»
5»
Measure the dimensions on the wire and
enter them in the screen below:
(1) - Select previous Processing.
2»
[F1]-OK (confirm message „Actualize“ with
[F1]-OK).
[F1] (back to the main menu).
3»
4»
5»
6»
7»
8»
[1]-Wire.
[1]-Edit current.
Go to the Raw Material symbol with [ENTER].
Select the Raw Material from the previous example = „Stranded 0.75 mm2 white“.
[ENTER] (The wire now uses the Processing defined in the library).
3 x [F1]-OK.
1»
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
1
171|230
16. Programming hints / examples
16.6
LIBRARY MODE
16.6.1 Default setting
This describes the wire production by using the libraries. For this a wire is produced with left and right
stripped ends and slitting.
Prerequisite to understand this chapter is the study of the programming example "16.5 Custom application (Page 168)".
Standard wires
Cross section
Wire length
Stripping length
Pull-off length
10 pcs.
0.75 mm2
500 mm
100 mm
5 mm
1»
Create a new single wire, wire name = “Stranded 0.75 mm2“.
2»
Set the values according to the values:
▄
▄
▄
Right end: Stripping length = 100 mm, pulloff length = 5 mm
Raw Material: Select from library (change to
Library mode with [F+][F6]) = „Stranded
0.75 mm2 white“ (saved values from previous chapter are acquired).
Processing: Is automatically carried from
"Preferred Processing" in the Raw Material
library. This ensures a processing with
parameters which the user has previously
approved as optimal.
1
(1) - Saved values in the library from the previous
example.
3»
[F2]-APPLICATION
4»
Enter the values according to the screen.
(1) - Take note that the library symbol is shown
here.
(2) - Values for slitting (Processing parameters for
the slitting have not to be set at this time
because there is already a default setting in the
Processing library).
172|230
1
2
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
16. Programming hints / examples
5»
6»
7»
8»
9»
Load the wire 0.75 mm2 on the machine.
[SINGLE] (produce a test wire).
Inspect wire (take special note on the slitting).
Copy the wire end to the other side.
[RUN].
In this example we assume, that the feed speed during the slitting operation was set too high. It will
be reduced in the following steps:
1»
2»
3»
4»
5»
6»
7»
[F1]-OK (back to the wire screen).
Go to the right wire end.
[F6]-PROCESSING
[F3]-ELEMENTS
[F5] (Go to element 2/2).
Reduce "Speed/Ramp" accordingly.
2 x [F1]-OK (confirm the warning "Actualize library settings“).
After confirming with [F1]-OK all applications in this chapter and all wires using this Processing
from the library are altered.
This is meaningful, if e. g. for a certain wire type the vendor has been changed.
The altered data can be saved locally in the wire with [F3]; the libraries are not affected this way.
However any global changes in the libraries will then not be altered for this wire.
8»
9»
16.7
[RUN]
Inspect the quality of the produced wire.
WIRE LIST
In this example we switch from "Single wire mode" to "Wire List mode" and a series of wires with different settings are produced.
1»
2»
3»
4»
3 x [F1]-OK (back to the "Wire- and Wire List files" screen).
[4]-New.
[F5]-WIRE LIST (at this point the Wire List mode is invoked).
Enter in the field below called "Wire name", the new name for this list = „Harness to OS9450“.
[F1]-OK (the screen „Wire List“ is shown).
[F2] (add a new wire to the Wire List).
[ENTER]
Enter a new name, e. g. the part number of
the wire (for this example = „123456-001“).
9» [ENTER] (the name is carried to the list).
10» [F4]-EDIT
5»
6»
7»
8»
11» [F+][F6]-LIBRARY MODE (switch to Library mode).
At this point it is advantageous to work in the Library mode. Differences in the Processing can be easily considered for each wire this way.
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
173|230
16. Programming hints / examples
12»
13»
14»
15»
16»
17»
18»
Select the Raw Material (same Raw Material as in chapter "Custom end".
Create a new wire setup (similar as in chapter "Partial strip with windows").
Enter "Total"=5, "Batch"=5.
[F1]-OK (back to the Wire List).
3 x [F1] (back to the "Wire- and Wire List files" screen).
[1]-Edit current.
[F2] (info „Create wire from scratch or [F3] to make a copy of the currently selected wire“).
19»
20»
21»
22»
23»
24»
25»
26»
27»
28»
29»
[F3]-COPY (the values from the first wire created are copied).
[ENTER]
Enter a new name (for this example = „123456-002“).
[F4]-EDIT
Alter the quantity, the batch size and the wire length etc.
[F1]-OK
With [F2] add three additional wires (to test more functions in this example).
Load the wire 0.75 mm2 on the machine.
The wire on top of the list is highlighted.
[SINGLE] (for checking purposes, only the highlighted wire will be produced).
Inspect the quality of the produced wire.
30» [RUN] (produce all 5 wires from the list).
While producing wires, the screen "Producing..."
displays the wire name, the already produced
wires, the batch etc.
31» [F1]-OK (confirm message "Batch and production complete").
32» [F5]-PROPERTIES
Here the number of passes and different messages for the production flow can be defined.
33» [F2]-STOP CONDITIONS (toggle standard
messages on / off).
34» Set stop condition for "Batch" to "Nothing".
35» [F1]-OK 2x.
36» [RUN] (after producing one batch, the message "Batch complete" does not show up anymore).
174|230
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
17. Maintenance / maintenance schedule
MAINTENANCE / MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
Periodic inspection and maintenance eliminates the feasibility of unexpected errors and improves the
reliability.
This chapter contains the description of general maintenance work to be done on the product, which
can be carried out by qualified and trained personnel on site.
All maintenance and cleaning work apply to one-shift-operation. For work in multiple shift operation,
the interval times are shorten accordingly.
17.1
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
17.1.1 Personal protective equipment
See chapter "2.9 Personal protective equipment (Page 18)".
17.2
CUSTOMER SERVICE
17.2.1 Hotline
We advise the customer in case of technical problems with the machine, to contact the local distributor first, see „http://www.schleuniger.com”.
17.2.2 Behavior in case of an error
If problems occur, which cannot be solved by the help of this manual, the Schleuniger distributor or
the technical staff of Schleuniger is ready to assist you. In such situations it is essential to provide a
precise description of the matter.
▄
▄
▄
▄
▄
▄
▄
Exact machine name
Serial number of product
Software version (incl. language packages).
Exact description of the error (error no. shown on the screen, if available)
Under what circumstances has the error shown up
What peripheral devices where connected to the machine when the error occurred
Wire type to be produced at the time the error occurred
Soft- and hardware versions and other information can be read in the diagnostics.
17.3
CLASSIFICATION
17.3.1 Access rights
See chapter "2.8.1 Personnel classification (Page 18)".
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
175|230
17. Maintenance / maintenance schedule
17.4
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
17.4.1 General
The development and construction of the machine is focused on a minimal maintenance effort. Maintenance work is mainly constricted on cleaning and lubricating certain components and removing
dust and debris. The listed maintenance intervals however can vary depending on the type of material produced and the environmental conditions.
It is important that the system is checked periodically to find out about the grade of dirt and abrasion.
17.4.2 Maintenance chart
Maintenance work must be accomplished according to the instructions and the time intervals listed.
Generally proceed according to the following chart:
17.5
Component
Activity
Interval
Reference
(Page)
Time consumed
(Min.)
Housing
clean
weekly
177
1 min.
Processing area
clean
daily
177
1 min.
Fan filter
check / replace
monthly
177
2 min.
Blade
check / replace
weekly
185
5 min.
Transport belts
check / replace
monthly
187
15 min.
Gear rod Y-axis cutter
head
lubricate
every 6 months 186
10 min.
Spur gear of transport
units
lubricate
every 6 months 186
10 min.
ABRASION SUSCEPTIBLE COMPONENTS
17.5.1 Transport unit left/right
The transport belts of the left and right transport unit are exposed to high force (depending on the
type of wire and the production frequency) and must be inspected regularly and being replaced if
necessary. See chapter "17.10.6 Replace transport belts (Page 187)".
17.5.2 Blades, cutter head
The blades of the cutter head are exposed to high force (depending on the type of wire and the production interval) and must be inspected regularly and being replaced if necessary. See chapter
"17.10.3 Stripping blades check / replace (Page 185)".
17.6
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS, DRAWINGS, SPARE PART LISTS
See chapter "20 Appendix (Page 193)".
Document „Parts Catalog“.
176|230
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
17. Maintenance / maintenance schedule
17.7
SPECIFICATION OF SPARE PARTS
See document „Parts Catalog“.
17.8
GENERAL MAINTENANCE WORK
17.8.1 Daily maintenance
The cleaning interval depends on the type of material processed and the intensity of the application.
The blade area, the wire guides and the transport belts should be held free of waste material in order
to ensure precise stripping results. Dirt and talcum residues may affect the functioning of the
machine. The machine has to be checked and necessarily be cleaned.
The instructions in this chapter must be carried out by the operator personnel!
WARNING
Electric current!
Before cleaning always switch off the main switch and unplug the product
from the mains. Disregarding may lead to serious injury or death.
NOTICE
Caution, property damage!
For cleaning never use solvents! Clean the exterior casing and the plastic
parts on the safety cover with a soft cloth and a usual commercial cleaning
agent.
Do not clean the machine with compressed air. There is a risk of stripping
waste pieces to penetrate into the drives and the interior of the machine.
Cleaning the housing and the processing area
1»
2»
3»
4»
5»
6»
7»
Clean the cover with a soft cloth and a commercially obtainable cleaning agent.
Switch off the machine.
Open the safety cover.
Remove wire and talc residue from the processing area with a brush or possibly with a
vacuum cleaner or another tool.
Clean the wire guides and feed units with
the supplied brush.
Close the safety cover.
Switch on the machine.
Checking/replacing the fan filters
The OmniStrip 9450 is equipped with air filters on the two ventilator exhausts to prevent dust and
other particles to get into the machine.
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
177|230
17. Maintenance / maintenance schedule
Fig. 30: Remove dust filter cover
The filters should be checked periodically depending on the usage of the machine, to prevent the
machine to overheat and to avoid faults. The filter can be cleaned with a vacuum cleaner. But if it is
heavily dirty, it must be replaced.
NOTICE
Caution, property damage!
Only use original Schleuniger filters. Using wrong filters may overheat the
machine or damage it due to dust penetrating into. Never operate the
machine without filters. Dust is depositing and may cause short circuit and
creeping currents in the electronics.
Necessarily replace filters when the machine warms up too much.
There are no fixed rules how often the filters have to be changed. The interval depends on the operating environment where the machine is placed to. A potential over temperature condition may be
monitored on the software diagnostic screen.
1»
In the main menu press [5]-Diagnostic > [2]Machine > [2]-Internal interfaces > [2]Inputs.
Ä In the screen below, the temperatures of
the most important hardware components is shown:
Level: 5-2-2-2
Temperature limits: If the limits stated below
are reached, the machine switches to "Safe
mode". Any drives are switched off thereby.
Panel = 75° C
Power amp = 65° C
Magnet drivers = 65° C
17.8.2 Lubrication
The instructions in this chapter must be carried out by qualified personnel!
178|230
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
17. Maintenance / maintenance schedule
NOTICE
Caution, property damage!
Only use the supplied lubricant according to the available instructions. Please
also consider the information about the lubricating grease in the "Appendix".
Drives
On the OmniStrip 9450 most of the drives and bearings are of a maintenance-free design. Lubricating
only is necessary in exceptional cases.
Applicable lubricating grease: Microlube GBU-Y 131
17.9
SETTINGS
The instructions in this chapter must be carried out by a technical specialist!
The machine was calibrated in the factory to your needs. After a blade replacement, the replacement
of mechanical or electrical components or when connecting a peripheral device, a re-calibration may
be necessary.
To always achieve constant precise results during operation, in some special cases the machine needs
to be re-calibrated after some time.
17.9.1 Calibration
Calibration sequence
NOTICE
Caution property damage!
Always proceed according to the following calibration sequence!
1»
2»
3»
4»
5»
Blade Z - Axis (Zero Z)
Transport units X - axis
▄
Feed resolution
Pre-processing devices
▄
HotStamp unit X - axis (distance)
▄
Inkjet printer X - axis (distance)
Calibration procedure
V-blades
As the blades are manufactured mechanically precisely, they have to be calibrated only in exceptional
cases. A calibration is necessary in cases the wires are cut to length improperly and if all normal setup
effort in the software has not produced reasonable results.
The beam of a flash light is hold into the wire entry. The blades have to be closed all the way until the
light is invisible from the other side of the machine. Now open the blades until a small light spot
appears. Out of it the value "Zero Z" can then be defined from.
1»
[4]-Configuration > [2]-Machine > [1]-Blades.
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
179|230
17. Maintenance / maintenance schedule
Level: 4-2-1
1»
2»
3»
4»
[4]-Configuration > [2]-Machine > [1]Blades.
[F3]-CALIBRATION: Start the guided calibration of the V-blades.
Select the V-blade to be calibrated from the
table.
[F3]-CALIBRATION is shown in the footer line, select it.
Level: 4-2-1-F3.
5»
[F1]-OK: Confirm when the blades have
been replaced.
The procedure of the calibration starting from this point is menu-guided.
6»
7»
8»
Open the safety cover.
Mount the blades to be calibrated.
Close the safety cover.
NOTICE
Caution, property damage!
During the automatic calibration the machine checks, if the V-Blades are in a
valid range. If the values are out of the given limits, the blades should be
checked for proper mounting.
9»
[F1]-OK
Level: 4-2-1
▄
▄
▄
▄
▄
[F2]: Open blades (large steps).
[F3]: Open blades (small steps).
[F4]: Reset to initial position for V -blades calibration.
[F5]: Close blades (small steps).
[F6]: Close blades (large steps).
10» Now shine a flashlight from the wire input side through the guide tube. Observe the flashlight
from the wire exit side.
180|230
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
17. Maintenance / maintenance schedule
11» Press [F5] or [F6] as often, until the light spot disappears.
12» Touch [F2] or [F3] until a tiny light spot (2) is
visible again.
13» [F1]-OK (the value is read and shown in the main screen, the action may be interrupted at any
time with [F7]-ABORT.
14» 3 x [F1]-OK (back to the main menu).
Radius blades
With the Radius blades there is no automatic or semi-automatic and guided calibration support. If
desired the radius blades can be defined as special blades, then the „Zero Z“ value is to be altered.
Die blades
The Die blades are closing down until the drive mechanism blocks. This condition is read out from the
encoder. With this measured value, the „Zero Z“ position of the blades can be exactly defined.
1»
[4]-Configuration > [2]-Machine > [1]-Blades.
Level: 4-2-1
2»
3»
4»
[F3]-CALIBRATION: Start the automatic
menu guided calibration of the Die-blades.
Select the Die blades to be calibrated from
the table in the screen.
Select [F3]-CALIBRATION
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
181|230
17. Maintenance / maintenance schedule
Level: 4-2-1-F3.
5»
[F1]-OK: Confirm when the blades have
been replaced.
6»
7»
8»
Open the safety cover.
Mount the Die-blades to be calibrated.
Close the safety cover.
During the automatic calibration the machine checks, if the Die-blades are in a valid range. If the
values are out of the given limits, the blades should be checked for proper mounting.
[F1]-OK (the value is read and shown in the main screen, the action may be interrupted at any
time with [F7]-ABORT.
10» 3 x [F1]-OK (back to the main menu).
9»
Special blades
With special blades, the calibration always has to be performed manually. The value must be entered
directly in the field "Zero-Z".
Transport units X-axis
Feed resolution
For calibration of this value, a wire 0.75 mm2 (0.0295 Inch) with a length of 1000 mm is produced. The
actual length of the wire must then be entered manually in the "Configuration". This calibration minimizes any inaccuracies with the feeding.
1»
[4]-Configuration > [2]-Machine > [3]-Transport units.
Level: 4-2-3
2»
3»
4»
[F3]-CALIBRATION: Start the guided calibration of the transport units - feed resolution.
Select "Feed - resolution“ in the above
screen.
[F3]-CALIBRATION is shown in the footer
line, select it.
Level: 4-2-3-[F3]
5»
182|230
[F1]-OK: Only select if the previous calibrations have been performed.
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
17. Maintenance / maintenance schedule
The procedure of the calibration starting from this point is menu-guided.
6»
7»
[F1]-OK
Insert the desired wire and produce it.
8»
Measure the wire length with a ruler and
enter it in the field "Length".
[F1]-OK (the value is read and shown in the
main screen, the action may be interrupted
at any time with [F7]-ABORT.
9»
10» 3 x [F1]-OK (back to the main menu).
Pre-processing devices
To calibrate the Pre-processing devices (HotStamp, Inkjet printer) they must be hooked up first. Then
a wire must be loaded and a „Zero cut“ be carried out. After this, a "PrintGO" command is triggered
and a mark is printed on the wire. Now the wire is fed until the marking is behind the cutting axis.
After a cut the produced wire can be removed. The distance has to be measured between the first cut
and the right end of the printed text with a ruler and entered in the field "Distance". This tells the
OmniStrip 9450 how far away the pre-processing device is positioned.
HotStamp unit X - axis (distance)
1»
[4]-Configuration > [1]-Pre-processing > [2]-HotStamp.
Level: 4-2-3
2»
3»
4»
[F3]-CALIBRATION: Start the guided calibration of the HotStamp.
Select "Distance" in the above screen.
[F3]-CALIBRATION is shown in the footer
line, select it.
Level: 4-1-2-[F3]
5»
[F1]-OK: Only select if the previous calibrations have been performed.
The procedure of the calibration starting from
this point is menu-guided.
6»
7»
[F1]-OK
Insert the desired wire and produce it.
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
183|230
17. Maintenance / maintenance schedule
Level: 4-1-2-[F3]
Place a marker on the wire with [F3]-STAMP.
Now the distance between the first cut and
the right end of the printed text is measured
with a ruler and entered in the field "Distance".
10» [F1]-OK (the value is read and shown in the
main screen, the action may be interrupted
at any time with [F7]-ABORT.
8»
9»
11» 3 x [F1]-OK (back to the main menu).
Inkjet printer X - axis (distance)
1»
[4]-Configuration > [1]-Pre-processing > [3]-Inkjet printer.
Level: 4-1-3
2»
[F3]-CALIBRATION: Start the guided calibration of the Inkjet printer.
From this point the calibration procedure is the
same as with a HotStamp.
17.10
MAINTENANCE / REPAIR WORK
17.10.1 General / safety
The instructions in this chapter must be carried out by a technical specialist!
DANGER
Dangerous line voltage!
For any maintenance and repair work on the machine, it must be turned off,
locked against switching on again and the power cord must be removed.
Dangerous line voltage is present inside the machine and around the area of
the mains socket, which can lead to serious injury or death.
NOTICE
Caution, property damage!
After each replacement of a component, make sure that all the adjustments
concerning this part are performed. Disregarding may lead to malfunction or
damage to the machine.
After replacing any components, an upgrade of the software has to be carried
out.
When replacing any defective components on the machine, the user must
compulsory follow the separate description if not stated in this Manual.
184|230
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
17. Maintenance / maintenance schedule
Before disassembly a component we recommend to make a drawing or to take a picture of the part.
This is helpful, especially if the repair work takes longer.
17.10.2 Opening the housing of the machine
1»
2»
Open the safety cover.
Loosen the 6 hex screws to the left and right on the housing.
3»
Swivel back the housing until it is bear well on the machine table. Thereby hold on the safety
cover with the other hand.
Notice: Caution property damage! Carefully observe that the housing does not bear on objects
laid about and thus is placed on the connectors for the peripheral devices, possibly underlay something in between the upper side of the housing and the table. The pins of the connectors (D-sub)
may be bent otherwise.
4»
After finishing work, close the housing analog to the above procedures in opposite order.
17.10.3 Stripping blades check / replace
If the blades are used up or the cutting edge is damaged, they must necessarily be replaced.
Otherwise, poor stripping quality and malfunction can result, in particular:
▄
▄
▄
Wire/cable jam
Bad production quality of wires/cables (cutting through and stripping)
Settings not reproducible
WARNING
Risk of injury!
The blades mounted on this machine have razor sharp edges, which can
cause serious injury if not handled properly during the blade change procedure.
Blade change on the cutter head
Replacing blades is described in detail in chapter "6 Installation / first commissioning (Page 43)".
For further information, see chapter "17.9 Settings (Page 179)".
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
185|230
17. Maintenance / maintenance schedule
For the calibration of the new blades, see chapter "13.4.2 Blade (Page 117)".
Maintenance on the blade infeed
The blade infeed mechanism must not be maintained respectively lubricated. The parts are live-time
lubricated.
17.10.4 Lubricating gear rod Y-axis of cutter head
1»
Opening the housing of the machine.
2»
3»
Clean the gear rod with supplied brush and
thinner.
Lubricate the gear rod with lubricating
grease „GBU-Y 131“, see "20.7 Lubricating
grease MICROLUBE GBU-Y 131 (Page 213)".
4»
Close the housing.
17.10.5 Lubricating the spur gear unit
1»
Open the housing of the machine.
2»
Lubricate the gear of the left transport unit with lubricating grease „GBU-Y 131“. The gears can
be moved by turning the transport belts on the front side.
Analog, lubricate the gear on the right transport unit.
3»
Notice: Caution, property damage! Only use a little grease!
186|230
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
17. Maintenance / maintenance schedule
4»
Close the housing.
17.10.6 Replace transport belts
This describes how used up transport belts are replaced, or a belt type with special surface (for difficult processable wires) is mounted, see „Parts Catalog“.
Always replace transport belts in pairs.
1»
2»
3»
4»
Switch on the machine.
Press [LOAD/UNLOAD] and remove the wire in production (the feed units must open fully).
Switch off the machine and unplug it from the mains.
Open the safety cover.
5»
Loosen the hex screw on the upper- or lower
side of the transport unit with a 4 mm hex
key.
6»
Turn the handle until the belt tensioning
unit (Eccenter) gets loose and can be
removed.
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
187|230
17. Maintenance / maintenance schedule
7»
8»
Slide off the transport belt first from the pulley without washer disc (1) and then from
the pulley with washer disc (2).
Slide on the new transport belt first on the
pulley with washer disc (2) and then on the
pulley without washer disc (1).
2
1
NOTICE
Caution, property damage!
The toothing on the transport belt and the pulley must match.
The left and right feed units on the machine have a different design.
9»
Mount the belt tensioner unit.
10» Tension the transport belt while turning the
handle backwards.
11» Tighten the hex screw on the upper- or lower side of the transport unit.
A
Notice: Caution, property damage! Do not
tighten the transport belts too much! Turn the
hand wheel (eccentric) only as far as the belt
between the pulleys can still be pushed approx.
1mm when applying soft tension.
The above procedure applies to all transport belts.
188|230
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
17. Maintenance / maintenance schedule
17.10.7 Exchanging mains fuses
1»
2»
Pull the fuse holder out of the power supply
module by means of a screwdriver.
Insert the new fuses into the fuse holder
slots.
With a fuse change always replace both mains
fuses (same type and rating).
100 – 115 VAC = 2 x 10 A/T.
230 – 240 VAC = 2 x 5 A/T.
3»
Insert the fuse holder back into the power
supply and plug in the power cord.
17.10.8 Battery replacement
The OmniStrip 9450 is equipped with a backup battery (live cycle approx. 10 years). Therefore with a
power loss or if the machine is not connected to the mains, the time and date values are retained.
If the battery voltage is insufficient, the time and date values are lost (the wire data are not affected in
this case). The backup battery must be replaced. The capacity of the backup battery can be monitored
in the "Diagnostic".
Level: 5-2-2-2
1»
In the main menu press [5]-Diagnostic > [2]Machine > [2]-Internal interfaces > [2]Inputs.
Ä The battery state „good or bad“ is shown.
If the battery voltage drops below a certain level,
a warning message is automatically shown on
the screen. See also chapter „Error messages”.
1»
2»
Opening the housing of the machine.
Remove the enclosure to the electronics by loosening the screws on the mounting flanches.
Then the enclosure can be lift out of the machine by a handle. Caution! Simultaneously unplug
the fan connector on the main PCB.
The backup battery is located on the main PCB of
the machine.
3»
Grasp the base support plate first with one
hand in order to discharge the body’s static
electrical charge. Take hold of the battery
with the other hand and remove it carefully
from the holder.
Notice: Caution, property damage! Exclusively
use the following type of battery:
3V CR2477, see „Parts Catalog“.
Thus
an
error-free
operation
of
the
OmniStrip 9450 is guaranteed.
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
189|230
18. Spare parts / exploded view drawings
4»
5»
6»
Mount the new battery, therefore grasp the
base support plate with one hand in order to
discharge the body’s static electrical charge.
With the other hand take hold of the new
battery by the edge and place it on the
mounting with the positive pole (+) facing
outwards.
Press the battery into the clamp until it
snaps in audible.
The battery must be flush with the outside of
the mounting.
Notice: Caution, property damage! Carefully
observe, that no screws and washers are left
inside of the machine, as they may lead to short
circuit in the electronics and cause malfunction.
7»
8»
9»
Mount the safety enclosure (prior to this plug in the connector of the fan).
Close the housing.
Connect the machine to the mains.
After a battery change on the OmniStrip 9450, the time and the date in the internal system clock is
reset and must be set up again. The „Reminder“ messages are not functioning anymore.
SPARE PARTS / EXPLODED VIEW DRAWINGS
For original Schleuniger spare parts see „Parts Catalog“.
190|230
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
19. Decommissioning / disposal
DECOMMISSIONING / DISPOSAL
The instructions in this chapter must be carried out by qualified personnel!
19.1
DECOMMISSIONING
To decommission the machine proceed as follows:
1»
2»
3»
4»
5»
19.2
Close the safety cover.
Switch off the main switch on the backside of the machine.
Disengage the emergency stop button.
Unplug the power cord and put it away.
If equipped with the air jet, switch off the air pressure on the air pressure supply and remove the
hose.
DISASSEMBLY / DISPOSAL
Disassemble the machine appropriately. Dispose of the disassembled parts according to the local
legal requirements.
Schleuniger machines mainly consist of the following materials:
Material
Disposal
Aluminum
Scrap metal
Steel
Scrap metal
Other metal
Scrap metal
Electro material
Electronic waste
Plastics
Recycling
NOTICE
Recycle the battery according to regulations!
The battery in this product contains heavy metals which are harmful to the
environment and is therefore hazardous waste. Recycle the battery!
For the localization of the battery, see chapter "17.10.8 Battery replacement (Page 189)".
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
191|230
19. Decommissioning / disposal
192|230
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
20. Appendix
APPENDIX
20.1
OVERVIEW OF SYMBOLS
The list shows the most important touch screen symbols used during programming and production
on the product.
20.1.1 Footer line and list symbols
Following there is a list of all symbols that may be shown in the footer lines and the Wire Lists:
Symbol
Description
Save entry, leave screen / OK
Symbol
Description
Discard entry, leave screen / cancel
Leave screen
Reset production state
Toggle Library mode / simple
mode
Single wire
Wire List
Raw Material library
Processing library
Complete processing
Select list item
List item unselected
Add
Navigate backwards
Navigate forwards
Delete
Toggle write protection
Toggle font size
Convert data file to current version
Wire end left / right
New line
Copy from right wire end
Copy from left wire end
Export data to USB memory stick
Import data from USB memory
stick
Save screen shot to USB memory
stick
Import into Wire List
Save as single wire
Data backup
Data export
Blade change
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
193|230
20. Appendix
Symbol
Description
Symbol
Description
Stripping, left
Stripping, right
Stripping, jacket left
Stripping, jacket right
Stripping, window left
Stripping, window right
Slitting, left
Slitting, right
Combing, left
Combing, right
Inwards
Outwards
Retract, fast
Extend, fast
Close
Open
Close, fast
Open, fast
Backwards
Forwards
Backwards, fast
Forwards, fast
Step by step
Switch off step by step
Step by step, pause
Step by step, slower
20.2
Step by step, automatically
Step by step, faster
TIME / DATE FORMATS
The formats for the time and date display are defined as follows:
20.2.1 Time formats
In the following chart, the date formats are defined according to the Schleuniger standard. The example in the right column corresponds to the "1.1.2000 17:12:13".
194|230
Format
Meaning
Example
H
Hour (24), leading zero
17
h
Hour (24)
17
I
Hour (12), leading zero
05
i
Hour (12)
5
M
Minute, leading zero
12
S
Second, leading zero
13
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
20. Appendix
Format
Meaning
Example
X
PM
x
pm
Y
P.M.
y
p.m.
20.2.2 Date formats
In the following chart, the date formats are defined according to the Schleuniger standard. The example in the right column corresponds to the "1.1.2000 17:12:13".
Format
Meaning
Example
D
Day, leading zero
01
d
Day
1
M
Month, leading zero
01
m
Month
1
Y
Year, 4-digits
2000
y
Year, 2-digits
W
Calendar week (ISO), leading zero
52
w
Calendar week (ISO)*
52
X
Corrected year for ISO calendar week, 4-digits
1999
x
Corrected year for ISO calendar week, 2-digits
99
V
Calendar week (USA), leading zero
01
v
Calendar week (USA)
1
00
*
*) The specification of calendar weeks according to ISO 8601 can cause that the first four
days of a year fall in the calendar week of the previous year.
Besides a compendium of Wikipedia:
▄
▄
Every Monday and only on Monday a new calendar week begins.
The first calendar week is that containing at least 4 days of the new year.
At this point the following conclusions can be made:
▄
▄
▄
▄
▄
No incomplete calendar weeks exist, unexceptional every calendar week contains exactly 7 days.
Each year has either 52 or 53 calendar weeks.
A year has exactly 53 calendar weeks if it starts or ends with a Thursday.
The 29., 30. and 31. December can already belong to the first calendar week of the following year.
The 1., 2. and 3. January can still belong to the last calendar week of the previous year.
Example:
▄
▄
Calendar week CW 52, 2003:
2003-W52 - Monday, 22. December 2003 to Sunday, 28. December 2003
Calendar week CW 1, 2004:
2004-W01 - Monday, 29. December 2003 to Sunday, 4. January 2004
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
195|230
20. Appendix
20.3
MACHINE SOFTWARE
20.3.1 Installation of upgrade tools
To install the software, the actual „Schleuniger Cayman and Cut & Strip installation CD” is needed. As
soon as it is inserted in the CD-ROM-drive of the computer, the following window is shown:
If the Autostart dialog does not appear (e. g. because the auto start function for CD is disabled on
your computer), it can be opened by double clicking on the file "Auto play.exe" in Windows ® explorer.
Installation on the Computer
196|230
1»
With the mouse click on „Upgrade Tools” in the OmniStrip 9450 field.
2»
[NEXT]
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
20. Appendix
3»
4»
5»
6»
7»
8»
Select the program installation path (normally the recommended path is used here).
[NEXT]
Here, additionally the manuals in PDF-format may be installed.
[NEXT]
Select the group (Normally the recommended program manager group is used here).
[NEXT]
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
197|230
20. Appendix
9»
If checking the box in the lower corner, the
data are copied directly to the USB memory
stick after this installation.
10» [NEXT]
11» The installation procedure of the upgrade
tools is now executing.
12» [FINISH]
198|230
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
20. Appendix
Copy the data to the USB memory stick
(If the checkbox in step 5 has been selected, the
next screen is automatically shown, which enables he user to copy the upgrade data directly to
the USB memory stick).
1»
[NEXT]
2»
Plug the USB memory stick into the computer and select the path.
[NEXT]
3»
Caution: Here select only the main folder, otherwise the machine finds no data during the
upgrade procedure!
4»
[NEXT]
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
199|230
20. Appendix
5»
The copy procedure is started.
6»
[FINISH] (The data are successfully stored
on the USB memory stick).
7»
The software upgrade may now be started, see chapter "15.4 Software-upgrade (Page 150)"
and/or an upgrade of the Windows CE operating system may be performed, see „Next Chapter”.
20.3.2 Windows CE Upgrade
Prerequisite to an upgrade of Windows CE is, that the necessary data have been stored successfully on
an USB memory stick, see chapter "20.3.1.2 Copy the data to the USB memory stick (Page 199)".
To perform an upgrade of Windows CE, a computer with a serial interface (RS232) must be available.
Additionally a serial Schleuniger PC interface cable (Part # 701.9120) is needed.
200|230
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
20. Appendix
Serial interface cable
Fig. 31: Installation for Windows CE Upgrade
1»
2»
3»
Connect the computer via the serial interface cable to the OmniStrip 9450. On the OmniStrip 9450
use the serial connector 1, on the computer the serial connector COM 1.
On the computer, in the start menu, select „Start > Programs > Schleuniger > OmniStrip 9450 >
Upgrade Tools” > and then the program „InstallWinCE”.
If no OmniStrip 9450 software is installed on the machine, continue with a). If the software was
installed already, continue with b):
a ) ------------------------------------------------▄
▄
▄
▄
Press the emergency stop button.
Leave the machine switched off for 30 second.
Connect the prepared USB memory stick to the machine.
In the program "InstallWinCE" press[START].
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
201|230
20. Appendix
▄
Switch on the machine (the screen remains dark).
b ) ------------------------------------------------▄
▄
Connect the prepared USB memory stick to the machine.
[START] In the program press "InstallWinCE" and on the machine select the function "Cold start
the machine" in the "Services menu" (machine is started again, the screen remains dark).
-------------------------------------------------
NOTICE
Caution data loss!
Do not switch off the machine during the upgrade procedure.
202|230
4»
[START] (The upgrade is executing and if successfully completed, a appropriate message
appears).
5»
6»
Switch off the OmniStrip 9450 for 10 sec. and then on again.
A successful upgrade may be verified in the diagnostics. [5]-Diagnose >[2]-Machine > [4]-Versions > [2]-Software.
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
20. Appendix
Connecting problems during the upgrade
By default, the software only checks COM 1 (normally the serial interface RS232 on a computer is set
to COM 1). If the computer cannot find the OmniStrip 9450, normally the serial interface connection is
not configured properly (this may occur if the computer has no serial interface but instead an USB
converter is used which is not configured to COM 1). In such a case the file:
"c:\Programme\OmniStrip9450UpgradeTools\InstallWinCE\InstallWinCE.ini"
must be opened with a text editor and the setting of „SerialPort=X” be altered accordingly.
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
203|230
20. Appendix
20.4
ELECTRIC INTERFACES
20.4.1 Connector HS / PF
For use with a PreFeeder
With Schleuniger PreFeeders the appropriate connection cable is delivered with the Prefeeder. As per
the following diagram, the D-sub-connector can be self-wired by a qualified technician.
PreFeeder
HS/PF interface
PFOUT
+24 VDC
S1
PFPRESENT
PFREADY
GND
D-Sub 15-pin (F)
Fig. 32: Connecting a PreFeeder
Input „PFREADY“, Pin 10 & 11:
If the D-sub connector is plugged in and the control contact S1 closed, the machine can be started
normally. By opening the contact S1 the automatic operation is interrupted and the error message
"PreFeeder blocked" is shown up on the display. After closing the contact S1 again, the program can
be continued with [RUN].
Output „PFOUT“, Pin 14 & 15:
This output is set to open collector (ground potential) during processing. This means the output is
held active. It is dimensioned for inductive loads up to 0.2 A at 24 VDC (relays, valves) and is protected against stress peaks.
For use with a HotStamp
The Schleuniger HotStamp devices are shipped with their appropriate connection cable. As per the
following diagram, the D-sub-connector can be self-wired by a qualified technician.
204|230
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
20. Appendix
HS/PF interface
HotStamp
HSINPUT
+24 VDC
HSOUT
+24 VDC
D-Sub 15-pin (F)
Fig. 33: Connecting a PreFeeder
Input „HSINPUT“, Pin 4 & 5:
When operating a wire marker through this input, the wire feeding on the OmniStrip 9450 is stopped
until the marking process is terminated.
Output „HSOUT“, Pin 1 & 2
The wire marker is operated through this output. It is dimensioned for inductive loads up to 0.2 A at
24 VDC (relays, valves) and is protected against stress peaks.
20.4.2 Serial Interfaces connections (Serial 1 - 3)
Serial 3 (Inkjet):
SERIAL 1 (PC) / SERIAL 2:
DCD
DSR
RxD
RTS
TxD
CTS
DTR
RI
Gnd
9-pin D-Sub (M)
DCD
DSR
RxD
Print GO
TxD
CTS
DTR
RI
Gnd
9-pin D-Sub (M)
Fig. 34: Pin assignment SERIAL interfaces 1/2 and 3
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
205|230
20. Appendix
20.4.3 PREFEED / POSTFEED connectors
Overview
The product has two interfaces which serve to connect peripheral devices that are used for wire preand post-processing. The first interface is provided for pre processing devices and is named "PREFEED" Interface. The second interface is provided for post processing devices and is named "Postfeed
Interface". Thanks to the programming flexibility, the interface may also be used for any custom specific purpose.
Both interfaces carry four PLC-compatible input and output signals each. In principle the behavior of
these signals can be freely programmed by the user. If the user connects predefined peripheral devices, e. g. a PreFeeder or a CableCoiler, some signals are given a definite function and then they are no
longer self-programmable. However, the other signals remain available for custom use.
The outputs can operate with ohmic as well as with inductive loads. This allows for the direct connection of relays or pneumatic valves.
The interface has two pulsed outputs for feed rate feed synchronization of peripheral devices. The
pulse outputs function similar to the signals of an incremental encoder. The feed direction of the wire
transport can be defined by means of impulse phasing. The impulse frequency is proportional to the
feed rate of the wire transport. The signals of the PREFEED interface are synchronized on the left
transport unit. The signals of the POSTFEED interface are synchronized on the right transport unit. To
ensure that impulses are transmitted error-free through long distances, a differential signal transmitting complying with ANSI TIA/EIA-422 (previously called RS422) is used.
Both interfaces have a respective input for the recognition of connected cables. For this, a connection
must be made between ground (GND) and this input in the connector housing. Due to the varying
pin assignment between PREFEED- and POSTFEED interfaces, this input avoids incautious mix-up of
connecting cables.
The POSTFEED interface has an additional output for the ejection control of a simple wire stacker. If
no wire stacker is connected, the behavior of this output can be programmed custom specific.
All the in- and outputs are galvanically coupled to GND, e. g. to +24 V supplies. This allows smaller
loads to be supplied directly from the OmniStrip 9450. Schleuniger recommends to galvanically
decouple the signals in the peripheral devices.
The shielded connector housings of the interface connectors are galvanically coupled to the chassis
of the OmniStrip 9450 and against earth. The connector housing however is galvanically decoupled
from GND. To avoid errors, the shielded body should also not be connected to GND outside the
OmniStrip 9450.
NOTICE
Caution, property damage!
Basically the interface is protected against overload, short circuit, electrostatic discharge and electromagnetic interference. With inappropriate use, overload situations may occur which are not covered by the internal protection
circuitry. This can lead to malfunction or even damage to the
OmniStrip 9450.
206|230
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
20. Appendix
PREFEED connector
PREFEED
LENCA
LENCA
LENCB
LENCB
Gnd
+24 V
LOUT3/PFOUT
LIN3/PFPRESENT
LOUT2
LIN2/PFREADY
LOUT1
LIN1
LOUT0
LIN0
Gnd
LDETECT
Gnd
+24 V
Shield
D-Sub 25-pin (F)
Fig. 35: Pin assignment „PREFEED“
Pin
Description
Function
Signal type
1
+24 V
-
Supply
-
2
-
(not implemented)
-
-
3
LDETECT
Wire sensing
Input
NPN
4
-
(not implemented)
-
-
5
LIN0
Multifunction input
Input
PNP
6
LIN1
Multifunction input
Input
PNP
7
LIN2
/PFREADY
Multifunction input
Input for acknowledgment from prefeeder
Input
PNP/NPN
PNP
8
LIN3
/PFPRESENT
Multifunction input
Input for recognition of a prefeeder
Input
PNP/NPN
PNP
9
+24V
-
Supply
-
10
-
(not implemented)
-
11
-
(not implemented)
-
-
12
LENCB
Impulse output for feed synchronization
Output
TIA/
EIA-422
13
LENCA
Impulse output for feed synchronization
Output
TIA/
EIA-422
14
-
(not implemented)
-
-
15
-
(not implemented)
-
-
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
207|230
20. Appendix
Pin
Description
Function
Signal type
16
GND
-
Supply
-
17
GND
-
Supply
-
18
LOUT0
Multifunction output
Output
PNP
19
LOUT1
Multifunction output
Output
PNP
20
LOUT2
Multifunction output
Output
PNP
21
LOUT3
/PFOUT
Multifunction output
Output to control a prefeeder
Output
PNP/NPN
PNP
22
-
(not implemented)
-
-
23
GND
-
Supply
-
24
/LENCB
Impulse output for feed synchronization
Output
TIA/
EIA-422
25
/LENCA
Impulse output for feed synchronization
Output
TIA/
EIA-422
POSTFEED connector
POSTFEED
RENCA
RENCA
RENCB
RENCB
Gnd
+24 V
ROUT3/CCEJECT/WSEJECT
RIN3/CCREADY/WSEJECTREADY
ROUT2/CCBINDING/WSBATCH
RIN2/CCSTART/WSBATCHREADY
ROUT1/CCSTOP/WSCONVEYOR
RIN1/WSCONVEYORREADY
ROUT0
RIN0
Gnd
RDETECT
Gnd
WSEJECT passive
+24 V
Shield
D-Sub 25-pin (F)
Fig. 36: Pin assignment „POSTFEED“
208|230
Pin
Description
Function
Signal type
1
+ 24 V
-
Supply
-
2
/WSEJECT passive
Output for the ejection control of passive
WireStackers
Output
NPN
3
-
(not implemented)
-
-
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
20. Appendix
Pin
Description
Function
Signal type
4
RDETECT
Wire sensing
Input
NPN
5
RIN0
Multifunction input
Input
PNP
6
RIN1
/WSCONVEYORREADY
Multifunction input
Input for acknowledgment from WireStackers
Input
PNP
PNP
7
RIN2
/CCSTART
/WSBATCHREADY
Multifunction input
Input for acknowledgment from CableCoilers
Input for acknowledgment from WireStackers
Input
PNP/NPN
PNP
PNP
8
RIN3
/CCREADY
/WSEJECTREADY
Multifunction input
Input for acknowledgment from CableCoilers
Input for acknowledgment from WireStackers
Input
PNP/NPN
PNP
PNP
9
+ 24 V
-
Supply
-
10
-
(not implemented)
-
-
11
-
(not implemented)
-
-
12
RENCB
Impulse output for feed synchronization
Output
TIA/EIA-422
13
RENCA
Impulse output for feed synchronization
Output
TIA/EIA-422
14
-
(not implemented)
-
-
15
-
(not implemented)
-
-
16
GND
-
Supply
-
17
GND
-
Supply
-
18
ROUT0
Multifunction output
Output
PNP
19
ROUT1
/CCSTOP
/WSCONVEYOR
Multifunction output
Output to control a cable coiler
Output to control a wire stacker
Output
PNP/NPN
PNP
PNP
20
ROUT2
/CCBINDING
/WSBATCH
Multifunction output
Output to control a cable coiler
Output to control a wire stacker
Output
PNP/NPN
PNP
PNP
21
ROUT3
/CCEJECT
/WSEJECT
Multifunction output
Output to control a cable coiler
Output to control a wire stacker
Output
PNP/NPN
PNP
PNP
22
-
(not implemented)
-
-
23
GND
-
Supply
-
24
RENCB
Impulse output for feed synchronization
Output
TIA/EIA-422
25
RENCA
Impulse output for feed synchronization
Output
TIA/EIA-422
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
209|230
12
12
10
SW?
OPB 930W51
SW?
OPB 930W51
Right Moveable Guide
OPB 930W51
OPB 930W51
Kabel Lichtschranke Führung
GKu
13
GKu
13
rt
rt
10
614003-1
bl
bl
614015-1
Kabel Magnet Führung
614015-1
Kabel Magnet Führung
614005-1
OPB 930W51
Motor Left Gap
7
J22
MOLEX 2.54 3Pol
614006-1
J12
MOLEX 2.54 2Pol
9
J41
Molex MiniFit 4Pol
OPB 930W51
Print Line Driver
012050-0
614019-1
Kabel Messrad OS 9450
634001-0
Kabel Valve
Print Line Driver
B
Mechatronic Board OS 9450
614007-1
614005-1
7
6
J8
MOLEX 2.54 2Pol
Motor Right Feed
PK299
Motor Bänder / Messer
614005-1
OPB 930W51
Motor Right Gap
7
17
Ventilator, Umwälzung
612017-1
6600-20-2-0.37
5
K
Umwälzung
VENTILATOR
Motor Bänder / Schnitt
614006-1
16
OUT, rechts
VENTILATOR
Lichtschranke Klemmbacken Home
544004-0
Ventilator
614010-1
16
IN, links
VENTILATOR
J18
MOLEX 2.54 5Pol
Motor Blade Change
OPB 930W51
6600-20-2-0.37
5
Motor Bänder / Messer
Kabel Sensor Schnitt
Kabel Encoder Schnitt
614008-2
J13
MOLEX 2.54 2Pol
1 GND
2 Index
3 Ch. A
4 +5V
5 Ch. B
Motor Cut
8
PK299
6
Motor Bänder / Schnitt
Motor Left Feed
PK299
6
J33
MOLEX 3.96 2Pol
Kabel Lichtschranke Bänder
6600-20-2-0.37
5
614011-1
J38
Molex MiniFit 4Pol
J30
MOLEX 2.54 5Pol
J29
MOLEX 3.96 2Pol
J31
MOLEX 3.96 2Pol
J32
MOLEX 2.54 5Pol
J26
MOLEX 2.54 5Pol
J25
MOLEX 3.96 2Pol
J27
MOLEX 3.96 2Pol
Motor Bänder / Messer
(In)
(Out)
(In)
(Out)
J34
MOLEX 2.54 5Pol
J28
MOLEX 2.54 5Pol
612002-4
15
Magnet Kabelende
614001-1
J15
MOLEX 2.54 2Pol
614003-1
J16
MOLEX 2.54 5Pol
012050-0
J6
3M 10Pol
Kabel Lichtschranke Führung
J19
MOLEX 2.54 5Pol
Left Moveable Guide
bl
bl
rt
rt
J11
MOLEX 2.54 2Pol
M6
Electromagnet
J40
Molex MiniFit 4Pol
Encoder (Reserve)
J39
Molex MiniFit 4Pol
14
J14
MOLEX 2.54 2Pol
J7
MOLEX 2.54 5Pol
Valve (Reserve)
J9
MOLEX 2.54 2Pol
OPB 930W51
J43
Molex MiniFit 4Pol
Panel
614011-1
J800
UN-MNL-2Pol
OPB 930W51
Kabel Lichtschranke Bänder
J10
MOLEX 2.54 2Pol
J42
Molex MiniFit 4Pol
Wire End Switch
with Auto Load
J801
UN-MNL-2Pol
210|230
J17
MOLEX 2.54 5Pol
612001-4
J6
FFC
J28
UN-MNL-2Pol
I
E
Artikel Nr.
<Artikel Nr.>
of
1
Kabel Fusspedal
614009-2
Rev
2.5
Versionen
Ind
Rev
1
0
1
1
2
0
2
2.1
2
2.2
2
2.3
2
2.4
2
2.5
-
Gezeichnet
Datum
Vis.
08.11.04
JR
24.02.05
JR
19.09.05
JR
23.01.07
brg
13.06.07
brg
29.01.08
brg
23.05.08
brg
27.11.08
brg
-
Ethernet / USB Connector
Board OS 9450
612005-3
614013-2
Kabel 24V Speisung
Display 320x240 konfektioniert
614014-2
Kabel 60V Speisung
614018-1
Thursday, November 27, 2008
1
Date:
Sheet
Source: L:\110_PRODUKTE\OS9450\HARDWARE\612000-2.DSN
612000-2
Block Diagramm OS 9450
Document Number
A2
Size
OS 9450
J21
MOLEX 2.54 4Pol
J20
MOLEX 2.54 5Pol
J24
MOLEX 2.54 3Pol
Title
J22
MOLEX 2.54 4Pol
Modul CPU
J23
Main Board OS 9450 MOLEX 2.54 3Pol
A
J6
ERNI SMC 50Pol
Kabel Frontpanel
614016-1
J2
ERNI SMC 50Pol
J3
FFC
J7
Molex 2.54 2Pol
Panel Board OS 9450
C
J5
Molex 2.54 5Pol
Freigegeben
Datum
Vis.
08.11.04
JR
24.02.05
JR
29.01.07
erk
13.06.07
erk
29.01.08
erk
23.05.08
erk
27.11.08
rst
-
Fusspedal
24V
60V
20.5
J24
MOLEX 2.54 5Pol
612003-5
20. Appendix
BLOCK DIAGRAM
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
1
L
E
4
7
Boden
Kabel Netzverdrahtung
22
12
Schraube
N
Schraube
PE
Schraube
L
2
3
2
Neutrik 3Pol
Gehäuse
<Artikel Nr.>
Artikel Nr.
CN2 (+)
Schraube
CN2 (+)
Schraube
CN2 (-)
Schraube
CN2 (-)
Schraube
VOSchraube
VOSchraube
VOSchraube
VOSchraube
VO+
Schraube
VO+
Schraube
VO+
Schraube
VO+
Schraube
Date:
Wednesday, January 24, 2007
Sheet
1
Source: L:\110_PRODUKTE\OS9450\HARDWARE\612000-2.DSN
612000-2
Document Number
Size
A3
Block Diagramm OS 9450
OS 9450
(MK150S-24)
24V Power Supply
H
60V Power Supply
Title
PE1
Schraube
21
11
SW2
Cover Switch
4
Kabel externer Notstop
614002-2
614012-1
Kabel Erde Netz-Bodenplatte
454017-0
2
2
1
1
2
1
Emergency Stop
3
CN1 (N)
Schraube
CN1 (L)
Schraube
L
1
Cy
Cy
P
N
F1
F2
FLT1
SHURTER CD
P
E
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
N
G
of
1
4
2
3
1
Rev
2.1
Versionen
Ind
Rev
1
0
1
1
1
2
2
0
2
1
-
Gezeichnet
Datum
Vis.
08.11.04
JR
24.02.05
JR
15.04.05
brg
19.09.05
JR
16.08.06
JR
-
Kabel 24V Speisung
24V
60V
Freigegeben
Datum
Vis.
08.11.04
JR
24.02.05
JR
15.04.05
jr
24.01.07
brg
-
Kabel 60V Speisung
614014-2
614013-2
External Capacitor
(4700uF / 100V)
20. Appendix
+
211|230
Cx
20. Appendix
20.6
LICENSES
20.6.1 EasyBmp C++ Bitmap Library
Copyright (c) 2005, The EasyBMP Project (http://easybmp.sourceforge.net)
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and
the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions
and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL
THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE
OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
212|230
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
20. Appendix
20.7
LUBRICATING GREASE MICROLUBE GBU-Y 131
Conforms to Regulation (EC) No. 1907/2006 (REACH), Annex II - United Kingdom (UK)
SAFETY DATA SHEET
MICROLUBE GBU-Y 131
Date of printing :
2011-12-01.
Date of issue 2011-12-01
SECTION 1: Identification of the substance/mixture and of the company/undertaking
1.1 Product identifier
Product name
Product code
Product description
: MICROLUBE GBU-Y 131
: 017117
: Grease
1.2 Relevant identified uses of the substance or mixture and uses advised against
Not applicable.
1.3 Details of the supplier of the safety data sheet
KLÜBER LUBRICATION MÜNCHEN KG
Geisenhausenerstrasse 7
D-81379 München
Tel: +49 (0) 897876-0
Fax: +49 (0) 897876-333
e-mail address of person
responsible for this SDS
: Material Compliance Management E-Mail: mcm@klueber.com
National contact
1.4 Emergency telephone number
Supplier
Emergency telephone
: 0049 (0) 897876-700 (24hrs)
number (with hours of
operation)
SECTION 2: Hazards identification
2.1 Classification of the substance or mixture
Product definition
: Mixture
Classification according to Regulation (EC) No. 1272/2008 [CLP/GHS]
Not classified.
Ingredients of unknown
toxicity
:
Ingredients of unknown
ecotoxicity
:
Classification according to Directive 1999/45/EC [DPD]
The product is not classified as dangerous according to Directive 1999/45/EC and its amendments.
Classification
: Not classified.
See Section 16 for the full text of the R phrases or H statements declared above.
See Section 11 for more detailed information on health effects and symptoms.
2.2 Label elements
Hazard pictograms
Signal word
Hazard statements
Precautionary statements
Prevention
Response
Storage
Disposal
Version
:
: No signal word.
: No known significant effects or critical hazards.
:
:
:
:
Not applicable.
Not applicable.
Not applicable.
Not applicable.
: 1
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
1/10
213|230
20. Appendix
Conforms to Regulation (EC) No. 1907/2006 (REACH), Annex II - United Kingdom (UK)
MICROLUBE GBU-Y 131
SECTION 2: Hazards identification
Hazardous ingredients
Supplemental label
elements
:
: Safety data sheet available for professional user on request.
Special packaging requirements
Containers to be fitted
: Not applicable.
with child-resistant
fastenings
Tactile warning of danger
2.3 Other hazards
Other hazards which do
not result in classification
Additional warning phrases
: Not applicable.
: Not available.
: Not available.
SECTION 3: Composition/information on ingredients
Substance/mixture
Description
: Mixture
: barium complex soap Synthetic hydrocarbon oil mineral oil
Classification
Product/ingredient
name
Benzenamine, Nphenyl-, reaction
products with 2,4,4trimethylpentene
Identifiers
EC: 270-128-1
CAS: 68411-46-1
%
<25
67/548/EEC
R52/53
Regulation (EC) No.
1272/2008 [CLP]
Aquatic Chronic 3,
H412
See Section 16 for
the full text of the Rphrases declared
above.
Type
[1]
See Section 16 for the
full text of the H
statements declared
above.
There are no additional ingredients present which, within the current knowledge of the supplier and in the
concentrations applicable, are classified as hazardous to health or the environment and hence require reporting in this
section.
Type
[1] Substance classified with a health or environmental hazard
[2] Substance with a workplace exposure limit
[3] Substance meets the criteria for PBT according to Regulation (EC) No. 1907/2006, Annex XIII
[4] Substance meets the criteria for vPvB according to Regulation (EC) No. 1907/2006, Annex XIII
Occupational exposure limits, if available, are listed in Section 8.
SECTION 4: First aid measures
4.1 Description of first aid measures
Eye contact
: Immediately flush eyes with plenty of water, occasionally lifting the upper and lower
eyelids. Check for and remove any contact lenses. Get medical attention if irritation
occurs.
Inhalation
: Remove victim to fresh air and keep at rest in a position comfortable for breathing.
Get medical attention if symptoms occur.
Skin contact
: Flush contaminated skin with plenty of water. Remove contaminated clothing and
shoes. Get medical attention if symptoms occur.
Ingestion
: Wash out mouth with water. Remove victim to fresh air and keep at rest in a position
comfortable for breathing. If material has been swallowed and the exposed person
is conscious, give small quantities of water to drink. Do not induce vomiting unless
directed to do so by medical personnel. Get medical attention if symptoms occur.
Protection of first-aiders
Version
214|230
: 1
: No action shall be taken involving any personal risk or without suitable training.
2/10
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
20. Appendix
Conforms to Regulation (EC) No. 1907/2006 (REACH), Annex II - United Kingdom (UK)
MICROLUBE GBU-Y 131
SECTION 4: First aid measures
4.2 Most important symptoms and effects, both acute and delayed
Potential acute health effects
Eye contact
: No known significant effects or critical hazards.
Inhalation
: No known significant effects or critical hazards.
Skin contact
: No known significant effects or critical hazards.
Ingestion
: No known significant effects or critical hazards.
Over-exposure signs/symptoms
Eye contact
Inhalation
Skin contact
Ingestion
:
:
:
:
No specific data.
No specific data.
No specific data.
No specific data.
4.3 Indication of any immediate medical attention and special treatment needed
Notes to physician
: Treat symptomatically. Contact poison treatment specialist immediately if large
quantities have been ingested or inhaled.
Specific treatments
: No specific treatment.
SECTION 5: Firefighting measures
5.1 Extinguishing media
Suitable extinguishing
media
Unsuitable extinguishing
media
: Use an extinguishing agent suitable for the surrounding fire.
: None known.
5.2 Special hazards arising from the substance or mixture
Hazards from the
: In a fire or if heated, a pressure increase will occur and the container may burst.
substance or mixture
Hazardous combustion
products
5.3 Advice for firefighters
Special precautions for
fire-fighters
Special protective
equipment for fire-fighters
: No specific data.
: Promptly isolate the scene by removing all persons from the vicinity of the incident if
there is a fire. No action shall be taken involving any personal risk or without suitable
training.
: Fire-fighters should wear appropriate protective equipment and self-contained
breathing apparatus (SCBA) with a full face-piece operated in positive pressure
mode. Clothing for fire-fighters (including helmets, protective boots and gloves)
conforming to European standard EN 469 will provide a basic level of protection for
chemical incidents.
SECTION 6: Accidental release measures
6.1 Personal precautions, protective equipment and emergency procedures
For non-emergency
: No action shall be taken involving any personal risk or without suitable training.
Evacuate surrounding areas. Keep unnecessary and unprotected personnel from
personnel
entering. Do not touch or walk through spilt material. Put on appropriate personal
protective equipment.
For emergency responders : If specialised clothing is required to deal with the spillage, take note of any
information in Section 8 on suitable and unsuitable materials. See also the
information in "For non-emergency personnel".
6.2 Environmental
precautions
: Avoid dispersal of spilt material and runoff and contact with soil, waterways, drains
and sewers. Inform the relevant authorities if the product has caused environmental
pollution (sewers, waterways, soil or air).
6.3 Methods and materials for containment and cleaning up
Version
: 1
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
3/10
215|230
20. Appendix
Conforms to Regulation (EC) No. 1907/2006 (REACH), Annex II - United Kingdom (UK)
MICROLUBE GBU-Y 131
SECTION 6: Accidental release measures
Small spill
: Stop leak if without risk. Move containers from spill area. Dilute with water and mop
up if water-soluble. Alternatively, or if water-insoluble, absorb with an inert dry
material and place in an appropriate waste disposal container. Dispose of via a
licensed waste disposal contractor.
Large spill
: Stop leak if without risk. Move containers from spill area. Prevent entry into sewers,
water courses, basements or confined areas. Wash spillages into an effluent
treatment plant or proceed as follows. Contain and collect spillage with noncombustible, absorbent material e.g. sand, earth, vermiculite or diatomaceous earth
and place in container for disposal according to local regulations (see section 13).
Dispose of via a licensed waste disposal contractor. Note: see section 1 for
emergency contact information and section 13 for waste disposal.
6.4 Reference to other
sections
: See Section 1 for emergency contact information.
See Section 8 for information on appropriate personal protective equipment.
See Section 13 for additional waste treatment information.
SECTION 7: Handling and storage
The information in this section contains generic advice and guidance. The list of Identified Uses in Section 1 should be
consulted for any available use-specific information provided in the Exposure Scenario(s).
7.1 Precautions for safe handling
Protective measures
: Put on appropriate personal protective equipment (see Section 8).
Advice on general
: Eating, drinking and smoking should be prohibited in areas where this material is
handled, stored and processed. Workers should wash hands and face before
occupational hygiene
eating, drinking and smoking. Remove contaminated clothing and protective
equipment before entering eating areas. See also Section 8 for additional
information on hygiene measures.
7.2 Conditions for safe
storage, including any
incompatibilities
7.3 Specific end use(s)
Recommendations
Industrial sector specific
solutions
: Store in accordance with local regulations. Store in original container protected from
direct sunlight in a dry, cool and well-ventilated area, away from incompatible
materials (see section 10) and food and drink. Keep container tightly closed and
sealed until ready for use. Containers that have been opened must be carefully
resealed and kept upright to prevent leakage. Do not store in unlabelled containers.
Use appropriate containment to avoid environmental contamination.
: Not available.
: Not available.
SECTION 8: Exposure controls/personal protection
The information in this section contains generic advice and guidance. The list of Identified Uses in Section 1 should be
consulted for any available use-specific information provided in the Exposure Scenario(s).
8.1 Control parameters
Occupational exposure limits
No exposure limit value known.
Recommended monitoring
procedures
: If this product contains ingredients with exposure limits, personal, workplace
atmosphere or biological monitoring may be required to determine the effectiveness
of the ventilation or other control measures and/or the necessity to use respiratory
protective equipment. Reference should be made to European Standard EN 689 for
methods for the assessment of exposure by inhalation to chemical agents and
national guidance documents for methods for the determination of hazardous
substances.
Derived effect levels
No DELs available.
Predicted effect concentrations
No PECs available.
Version
216|230
: 1
4/10
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
20. Appendix
Conforms to Regulation (EC) No. 1907/2006 (REACH), Annex II - United Kingdom (UK)
MICROLUBE GBU-Y 131
SECTION 8: Exposure controls/personal protection
8.2 Exposure controls
Appropriate engineering
controls
: No special ventilation requirements. Good general ventilation should be sufficient to
control worker exposure to airborne contaminants. If this product contains
ingredients with exposure limits, use process enclosures, local exhaust ventilation or
other engineering controls to keep worker exposure below any recommended or
statutory limits.
Individual protection measures
Hygiene measures
: Wash hands, forearms and face thoroughly after handling chemical products, before
eating, smoking and using the lavatory and at the end of the working period.
Appropriate techniques should be used to remove potentially contaminated clothing.
Wash contaminated clothing before reusing. Ensure that eyewash stations and
safety showers are close to the workstation location.
Eye/face protection
Skin protection
Hand protection
Body protection
Other skin protection
Respiratory protection
Environmental exposure
controls
: Safety eyewear complying with an approved standard should be used when a risk
assessment indicates this is necessary to avoid exposure to liquid splashes, mists,
gases or dusts.
: Chemical-resistant, impervious gloves complying with an approved standard should
be worn at all times when handling chemical products if a risk assessment indicates
this is necessary.
: Personal protective equipment for the body should be selected based on the task
being performed and the risks involved and should be approved by a specialist
before handling this product.
: Appropriate footwear and any additional skin protection measures should be
selected based on the task being performed and the risks involved and should be
approved by a specialist before handling this product.
: Use a properly fitted, air-purifying or air-fed respirator complying with an approved
standard if a risk assessment indicates this is necessary. Respirator selection must
be based on known or anticipated exposure levels, the hazards of the product and
the safe working limits of the selected respirator.
: Emissions from ventilation or work process equipment should be checked to ensure
they comply with the requirements of environmental protection legislation. In some
cases, fume scrubbers, filters or engineering modifications to the process
equipment will be necessary to reduce emissions to acceptable levels.
SECTION 9: Physical and chemical properties
9.1 Information on basic physical and chemical properties
Appearance
Physical state
: Paste.
Colour
: Beige.
Odour
: Characteristic.
pH
: Not available.
Melting point/freezing point
: Not available.
Initial boiling point and boiling : Not available.
range
Flash point
Flammability (solid, gas)
Burning time
Burning rate
:
:
:
:
Upper/lower flammability or
explosive limits
: Not available.
Vapour pressure
Density
Bulk Density
: Not available.
: 0.95 g/cm3 [20°C]
: Not available.
Solubility(ies)
: Insoluble in the following materials: cold water.
Partition coefficient: noctanol/water
: Not available.
Version
Not applicable.
Not available.
Not applicable.
Not applicable.
: 1
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
5/10
217|230
20. Appendix
Conforms to Regulation (EC) No. 1907/2006 (REACH), Annex II - United Kingdom (UK)
MICROLUBE GBU-Y 131
SECTION 9: Physical and chemical properties
Auto-ignition temperature
Decomposition temperature
Viscosity
Explosive properties
Oxidising properties
:
:
:
:
:
Not available.
Not available.
Not available.
Not available.
Not available.
9.2 Other information
No additional information.
SECTION 10: Stability and reactivity
10.1 Reactivity
: No specific test data related to reactivity available for this product or its ingredients.
10.2 Chemical stability
: The product is stable.
10.3 Possibility of
hazardous reactions
: Under normal conditions of storage and use, hazardous reactions will not occur.
10.4 Conditions to avoid
: No specific data.
10.5 Incompatible materials
: No specific data.
10.6 Hazardous
decomposition products
: Under normal conditions of storage and use, hazardous decomposition products
should not be produced.
SECTION 11: Toxicological information
11.1 Information on toxicological effects
Acute toxicity
Product/ingredient name
Residual oils (petroleum),
hydrotreated
Result
LD50 Dermal
LD50 Oral
Benzenamine, N-phenyl-,
LD50 Dermal
reaction products with 2,4,4trimethylpentene
LD50 Oral
Conclusion/Summary
Acute toxicity estimates
Not available.
Species
Dose
Exposure
Rat
>5000 mg/kg
-
Rat
Rabbit
>5000 mg/kg
>2000 mg/kg
-
Rat
>5000 mg/kg
-
: Not available.
Irritation/Corrosion
Conclusion/Summary
: Not available.
Sensitiser
Conclusion/Summary
: Not available.
Mutagenicity
Conclusion/Summary
: Not available.
Carcinogenicity
Conclusion/Summary
: Not available.
Reproductive toxicity
Conclusion/Summary
: Not available.
Teratogenicity
Conclusion/Summary
: Not available.
Specific target organ toxicity (single exposure)
Not available.
Specific target organ toxicity (repeated exposure)
Version
218|230
: 1
6/10
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
20. Appendix
Conforms to Regulation (EC) No. 1907/2006 (REACH), Annex II - United Kingdom (UK)
MICROLUBE GBU-Y 131
SECTION 11: Toxicological information
Not available.
Aspiration hazard
Not available.
Information on the likely
routes of exposure
: Not available.
Potential acute health effects
Inhalation
: No known significant effects or critical hazards.
Ingestion
: No known significant effects or critical hazards.
Skin contact
: No known significant effects or critical hazards.
Eye contact
: No known significant effects or critical hazards.
Symptoms related to the physical, chemical and toxicological characteristics
Inhalation
: No specific data.
Ingestion
: No specific data.
Skin contact
: No specific data.
Eye contact
: No specific data.
Delayed and immediate effects and also chronic effects from short and long term exposure
Short term exposure
Potential immediate
: Not available.
effects
Potential delayed effects : Not available.
Long term exposure
Potential immediate
: Not available.
effects
Potential delayed effects : Not available.
Potential chronic health effects
Not available.
Conclusion/Summary
General
Carcinogenicity
Mutagenicity
Teratogenicity
Developmental effects
Fertility effects
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
Not available.
No known significant effects or critical hazards.
No known significant effects or critical hazards.
No known significant effects or critical hazards.
No known significant effects or critical hazards.
No known significant effects or critical hazards.
No known significant effects or critical hazards.
Other information
: Not available.
SECTION 12: Ecological information
12.1 Toxicity
Product/ingredient name
Result
Species
Exposure
Residual oils (petroleum),
hydrotreated
Acute EC50 >10000 mg/l
Daphnia
48 hours
Acute IC50 >1000 mg/l
Acute LC50 1000 to 5000 mg/l
Chronic NOEC >5000 mg/l
Algae
Fish
Fish
96 hours
96 hours
96 hours
Conclusion/Summary
: Not available.
12.2 Persistence and degradability
Conclusion/Summary
: Not available.
12.3 Bioaccumulative potential
Not available.
Version
: 1
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
7/10
219|230
20. Appendix
Conforms to Regulation (EC) No. 1907/2006 (REACH), Annex II - United Kingdom (UK)
MICROLUBE GBU-Y 131
SECTION 12: Ecological information
12.4 Mobility in soil
Soil/water partition
coefficient (KOC)
: Not available.
Mobility
: Not available.
12.5 Results of PBT and vPvB assessment
PBT
: Not applicable.
vPvB
: Not applicable.
12.6 Other adverse effects
: No known significant effects or critical hazards.
SECTION 13: Disposal considerations
The information in this section contains generic advice and guidance. The list of Identified Uses in Section 1 should be
consulted for any available use-specific information provided in the Exposure Scenario(s).
13.1 Waste treatment methods
Product
Methods of disposal
: The generation of waste should be avoided or minimised wherever possible.
Significant quantities of waste product residues should not be disposed of via the
foul sewer but processed in a suitable effluent treatment plant. Dispose of surplus
and non-recyclable products via a licensed waste disposal contractor. Disposal of
this product, solutions and any by-products should at all times comply with the
requirements of environmental protection and waste disposal legislation and any
regional local authority requirements.
Hazardous waste
: Within the present knowledge of the supplier, this product is not regarded as
hazardous waste, as defined by EU Directive 91/689/EEC.
Packaging
Methods of disposal
Special precautions
: The generation of waste should be avoided or minimised wherever possible. Waste
packaging should be recycled. Incineration or landfill should only be considered
when recycling is not feasible.
: This material and its container must be disposed of in a safe way. Empty containers
or liners may retain some product residues. Avoid dispersal of spilt material and
runoff and contact with soil, waterways, drains and sewers.
SECTION 14: Transport information
ADR/RID
IMDG
IATA
14.1 UN number
Not regulated.
Not regulated.
Not regulated.
14.2 UN proper
shipping name
-
-
-
14.3 Transport
hazard class(es)
-
-
-
14.4 Packing
group
-
-
-
14.5
Environmental
hazards
No.
No.
No.
14.6 Special
precautions for
user
Not available.
Not available.
Not available.
Additional
information
-
-
-
Version
220|230
: 1
8/10
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
20. Appendix
Conforms to Regulation (EC) No. 1907/2006 (REACH), Annex II - United Kingdom (UK)
MICROLUBE GBU-Y 131
SECTION 14: Transport information
14.7 Transport in bulk
according to Annex II of
MARPOL 73/78 and the IBC
Code
: Not available.
SECTION 15: Regulatory information
15.1 Safety, health and environmental regulations/legislation specific for the substance or mixture
EU Regulation (EC) No. 1907/2006 (REACH)
Annex XIV - List of substances subject to authorisation
Substances of very high concern
None of the components are listed.
Annex XVII - Restrictions : Not applicable.
on the manufacture,
placing on the market and
use of certain dangerous
substances, mixtures and
articles
Other EU regulations
Europe inventory
Black List Chemicals
Priority List Chemicals
Integrated pollution
prevention and control
list (IPPC) - Air
Integrated pollution
prevention and control
list (IPPC) - Water
:
:
:
:
Not determined.
Not listed
Not listed
Not listed
: Not listed
International regulations
Chemical Weapons
Convention List Schedule I
Chemicals
: Not listed
Chemical Weapons
Convention List Schedule II
Chemicals
: Not listed
Chemical Weapons
Convention List Schedule III
Chemicals
: Not listed
15.2 Chemical Safety
Assessment
: This product contains substances for which Chemical Safety Assessments are still
required.
SECTION 16: Other information
Indicates information that has changed from previously issued version.
Abbreviations and
: ATE = Acute Toxicity Estimate
CLP = Classification, Labelling and Packaging Regulation [Regulation (EC) No.
acronyms
1272/2008]
DNEL = Derived No Effect Level
EUH statement = CLP-specific Hazard statement
PNEC = Predicted No Effect Concentration
RRN = REACH Registration Number
Procedure used to derive the classification according to Regulation (EC) No. 1272/2008 [CLP/GHS]
Classification
Justification
Not classified.
Full text of abbreviated H
statements
Full text of classifications
[CLP/GHS]
Version
: H412
Harmful to aquatic life with long lasting effects.
: Aquatic Chronic 3, H412 AQUATIC TOXICITY (CHRONIC) - Category 3
: 1
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
9/10
221|230
20. Appendix
Conforms to Regulation (EC) No. 1907/2006 (REACH), Annex II - United Kingdom (UK)
MICROLUBE GBU-Y 131
SECTION 16: Other information
Full text of abbreviated R
phrases
: R52/53- Harmful to aquatic organisms, may cause long-term adverse effects in the
aquatic environment.
Full text of classifications
[DSD/DPD]
Version
Date of printing
Date of issue
Date of previous issue
Prepared by
: Not applicable.
:
:
:
:
:
1
2011-12-01.
2011-12-01
2011-12-01.
Material Compliance Management
+49 (0) 89 7876 1564
Notice to reader
This safety datasheet applies only to products originally packaged and labelled by KLÜBER LUBRICATION.
The information contained therein is protected by copyright and must not be reproduced or amended without
the express written approval of KLÜBER LUBRICATION. This document may be passed on only to the extent
required by law. Any dissemination of our safety datasheets (e.g. as a document for download from the
Internet) beyond this legally required extent is not permitted without express written consent.
KLÜBER LUBRICATION provides its customers with amended safety datasheets as prescribed by law. The
customer is responsible for passing on safety datasheets and any amendments contained therein to its own
customers, employees and other users of the product. KLÜBER LUBRICATION provides no guarantee that
safety datasheets received by users from third parties are up-to-date.
All information and instructions in this safety datasheets were compiled to the best of our knowledge and are
based on the information available to us. The data provided are intended to describe the product in relation to
the required safety measures; they are neither an assurance of characteristics nor a guarantee of the product's
suitability for particular applications and do not justify any contractual legal relationships.
Version
222|230
: 1
10/10
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
Personal notes
.....................................................................................
.....................................................................................
.....................................................................................
.....................................................................................
.....................................................................................
.....................................................................................
.....................................................................................
.....................................................................................
.....................................................................................
.....................................................................................
.....................................................................................
.....................................................................................
.....................................................................................
.....................................................................................
.....................................................................................
.....................................................................................
.....................................................................................
.....................................................................................
.....................................................................................
.....................................................................................
.....................................................................................
.....................................................................................
.....................................................................................
.....................................................................................
.....................................................................................
.....................................................................................
.....................................................................................
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
223|230
Personal notes
.....................................................................................
.....................................................................................
.....................................................................................
.....................................................................................
.....................................................................................
.....................................................................................
.....................................................................................
.....................................................................................
.....................................................................................
.....................................................................................
.....................................................................................
.....................................................................................
.....................................................................................
.....................................................................................
.....................................................................................
.....................................................................................
.....................................................................................
.....................................................................................
.....................................................................................
.....................................................................................
.....................................................................................
.....................................................................................
.....................................................................................
.....................................................................................
.....................................................................................
.....................................................................................
.....................................................................................
.....................................................................................
.....................................................................................
224|230
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
Index
INDEX
@
@-key 78
A
Accident prevention regulations 11
Activity LED 142
Air jet 85
Air jet unit 28, 37, 119
Alpha numeric keyboard 34
Amount of layers 91
Area application 73
Area of blades 59
Area
- add 75
- Add 166
- HotStamp 166
- Inkjet 166
- Manage 167
- Switch off 167
Areas 75
B
Background display 121
Bad stripping quality 185
Basic settings 113
Battery 191
Battery state 144
Bearing 179
Blade 176, 185
Blade amount 24
Blade area 177
Blade change 46, 118
Blade position 40
Blade
- block 81
- scratch 160
- width 117
Branches 94, 170
C
CableCoiler 127, 131
Calculator screen 157
CAN 29
Cayman
- Ethernet Port 120
- Support 120
Characters 64
Classifications 18
Cleaning interval 177
Clock setting 117
Coaxial cables 27
Comb 92
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
Combing 74
Combing device 41
Commands 13
Comment 104
Commercial cleaning agent 177
Commissioning 43
Component 184
Compressed air 44, 177
Configuration 60
Connection cable 126, 204
Connector
- HotStamp 204
- Prefeed 207
- Prefeeder 204
- Serial 205
Contact pressure 136
Control contact 204
Control electronics 32
Correction
- Feed speed 173
- inner wires 164
- Optimize production speed 161
- Processing setting 159
- Scrap marks 160
Cover switch 142
Creeping current 178
Cross references 13
Custom end 90
Custom ends 91
Cutter head 28, 38, 176
Cutter head
- calibrate 118
Cutting axis 126
D
Daily maintenance 177
Danger zones 33
Dangerous zones 32
Data import 66
Data segments 120
Date format 120
Default value 155
Defective component 184
Delay time after signal 116
Diag/conf menu 120
Diagnostic 135
Diagnostic software 138
Diagnostics 60
Diameter conductor 91
Diameter insulation 91
Die blades 40
Dimensions 23
Direction 170
225|230
Index
Display background 120
Display contrast 120
Disposal 12, 191
Drives 179
D-sub connector 204
E
Ejection 127
Ejection speed 128
Electromagnetic interference 206
Electrostatic discharge 206
Emergency stop button 28, 32, 43
Emergency stop link 19
End processing 90
Entry field 64, 95
Entry keys 30
Environment 23
Error 138
Errors 175
Ethernet 24, 29
Example
- Custom end 168
- Library mode 172
Examples
- 165
External emergency stop link unit 29
F
Fan 28
Fan exhaust 25
Fan filter 135
Fault indicator 135
Fault localization 135
Feed control 82
Feed synchronization 206
File operation 64
Firmware 146
First switch on 44
Font type 166
Footer line 36, 60
Footer line symbol 60
Footer line symbols 193
Function keys 30
Fuse holder 32
G
Galvanically decoupled 206
Ground potential 204
Guidelines 13
H
Header line 60
Help text 60
Hotline 175
226|230
HotStamp 39, 125
HS/PF 29
I
Incision 40
Incision diameter 136
Inductive load 205
Info 12
Inkjet printer 126
Inner diameter 91
Input area 60
Inspection 175
Installation regulations 43
Intended application 16
Interface 118
Interface cable 125
Interface connection cable 15
Interior 177
IP address 118
K
Keyboard beep 120
Kick off 128
Kynar 40
L
Language 45, 120
Layer 92
Layer sectioning 94
Layer/Mode 94
Left entry guide 45
Left swivel guide 28
Left transport unit 28
Left wire guide 28, 37
Length 170
Length correction 157
Length unit 120
Liability for damage 13
Library 172
Library mode 53, 54, 89
Library record 54
Limit values 24
Load 206
Local Processing element 73, 93, 170
Lubricant 179
Lubricating grease 15
M
Machine configuration 133
Machine feet 25
Machine identification 146
Machine name 120, 175
Magnifier 12
Main power switch 36
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
Index
Main switch 43
Mains connection 24, 29, 36
Mains fuses 36
Mains socket 32, 43
Mains supply 43
Maintenance 175
Maintenance unit 44
Marker 56
Marking 165
Marking device 127
Measures 13, 23
Measuring unit 45
Memory 146
Menu level 12
Mode 92, 170
Mouse
- Acceleration 120
- Exchange keys 120
- Pointer 36
- Support 120
- Wheel 36
Multi-step stripping 91
Offset 128
Operating personnel 12
Operator panel 28, 33
Original spare parts 14
Outer diameter 91
Over temperature 25
Overload 206
Postfeed interface 206
Power 31
Power cord 73
Power Cords 27
Pre-/postfeed interface 206
PREFEED 29
Prefeeder 124, 125
PreFeeder 39, 204
Preferred processing 91
Print function 167
Printing wheel 126
Problematic materials 40
Processing 54, 169
Processing axes 128
Processing axis 125
Processing elements 90
Processing library 60, 97
Processing problems 160
Processing
- copy 98
- load 98
- manage 98
- new 98
- rename 98
Production frequency 176
Production keys 30
Production prepare 119
Production quantity 127
Production speed 162
Production state 111, 161
Productivity 161
Programming example 155
Protective equipment 18
Pull-off length 24, 57, 72
Pull-off speed 136
Pulse duration 116
Pulse output 206
P
Q
N
Navigation keys 30
New wire mode 120
Noise emission 24
O
Panel 120
PC-mouse 36
Pedal 29
Peripheral device 24, 44, 179, 206
Personnel older than 14 years 18
PLC-compatible input 206
POF 27
Port number 120
Position 170
Position of center of gravity 23
Position
- while blade change 81
- while feeding 81
Post processing 122, 206
Postfeed 208
POSTFEED 29
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
Quality of stripping 51
R
Radius blades 40
Ramp 81
Rating plate 25, 29
Raw Material 54, 91, 169
Raw Material library 60, 95
Raw Material
- copy 96
- load 96
- manage 96
- new 96
- rename 96
Re-calibration 179
Registered trademarks 14
227|230
Index
Regrip 160
Regular inspection 135
Relative humidity (maximum) 23
Right full strip 93, 170
Right guide 38, 93, 170
Right movable wire guide 28
Right transport unit 28
RS 232 24
S
Safe mode 42
Safety barrier 19
Safety cover 19, 28, 31
Safety hood 19
Safety interlocks 19
Safety regulations 11
Safety switch 28
Schleuniger distributor 175
Schleuniger original fan filter 178
Schleuniger system rack 25
Screen 30, 33
Screen titles 13
Screen
- Processing library 97
- Application 91
- Wire and Wire list 156
Separate 92
Serial number 175
Service 120
Services 60
Shielded connector 206
Short circuit 178, 206
Short mode 24, 119, 135
Shorten 93
Signal names 13
Simple mode 53
Slitting 74, 92
Slug 56, 83, 167
Software Version 175
Solvent 177
Special blade 40
Standard gateway 118
Standards 13
Start counter 78
Step 93, 170
Step by step 160, 161
Storage capacity 24
Strip 92
Strip offset 86
Stripping length 72
Subnet mask 118
Swivel guide 46
T
Talcum 177
228|230
TCP/IP network 118
Teflon 40
Temperature unit 45, 120
Tension force wire straightener 136
Third parties 13
Time format 120
Tip 12
Tooltipp 60
Total wires 71
Touch screen symbols 193
Trademarks 13
Transport 143
Transport belt 176, 177
Transport fixations 20
Transport speed 136
Transport system 24
Transport unit 176
Transport units 37
U
Universal slitting unit 40
USB 29
USB interface 24
USB memory stick 198
USB
- keyboard 120
- Memory stick 150
- Mouse 36
User level 45
User levels 61
V
Variable fields 78
V-blade 40
Version number 135
Visible check 59
Voltage 32, 43
W
Warning notice 15
Waste 12
Windows® 13
Wire diameter stranded 24
Wire end 71
Wire end switch 28, 37, 119, 142
Wire end
- set 50
Wire entry 37
Wire entry guide 28
Wire feeding 205
Wire guide 177
Wire length 71
Wire List 55, 99
Wire list mode 53, 120
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
Index
Wire List
- Change Processing 103
- Change Raw Material 103
- Order 103
- Stop condition 103
Wire marker 205
Wire name 57
Wire processing concept 53
Wire processing software Cayman 120
Wire residue 167
Wire sensing 207
Wire type 175
Wire/cable jam 185
Wire
- reload 110
- Save current 65
Reference Manual |Edition 8.1 (11-2013) |OmniStrip 9450
- Save current as 65
- Load 65
- Manage 66
- new 65
- Rename 65
- unload 109
Wirerap 40
WireStacker 127, 128
Write protection 64
Z
Zero cut 111
Zero Z 118
Zip cords 27
229|230